Note: Descriptions are shown in the official language in which they were submitted.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
Case 7368
CLEANING COMPOSITION, PAD, WIPE, IMPLEMENT, AND SYSTEM
AND METHOD OF USE THEREOF
Nicola J. Policicchio
Preston J. Rhamy
Michael W. Dusing
Kenneth W. Willman
Rhonda J. Jackson
TECHNICAL FIELD
The present invention relates to cleaning compositions, pads, sheets, wipes,
and implements useful in removing soils from hard surfaces. The cleaning pads
and/or
sheets contain improved structure comprising apertured formed films,
functional
cuffs, density gradients, adhesive scrubbing strips, and/or perfume carrier
complex.
The cleaning sheets are designed so as to provide functional cuffs. The
present
invention also relates to a cleaning implement comprising a handle and,
preferably, an
improved removable absorbent cleaning pad. The present invention further
relates to
methods of using cleaning compositions, pads, sheets, wipes, and implements to
clean
hard surfaces.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The literature is replete with products capable of cleaning hard surfaces such
as ceramic tile floors, hardwood floors, counter tops and the like. In the
context of
cleaning floors, numerous devices are described comprising a handle and some
means
for absorbing a fluid cleaning composition. Such devices include those that
are
reusable, including mops containing cotton strings, cellulose and/or synthetic
strips,
sponges, and the like. While these mops are successful in removing many soils
from
hard surfaces, they typically require the inconvenience of performing one or
more
rinsing steps during use to avoid saturation of the material with dirt, soil,
and other
residues. These mops therefore require the use of a separate container to
perform the
rinsing step(s), and typically these rinsing steps fail to sufficiently remove
dirt
residues. This can result in redeposition of significant amounts of soil
during
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-2-
subsequent passes of the mop. Furthermore, as reusable mops are used over
time, they
become increasingly soiled and malodorous. This negatively impacts subsequent
cleaning performance.
To alleviate some of the negative attributes associated with reusable mops,
attempts have been made to provide mops having disposable cleaning pads. For
example, U.S. Patent No. 5,094,559, issued March 10, 1992 to Rivera et al.,
describes
a mop that includes a disposable cleaning pad comprising a scrubber layer for
removing soil from a soiled surface, a blotter layer to absorb fluid after the
cleaning
process, and a liquid impervious layer positioned between the scrubber and
blotter
layer. The pad further contains a rupturable packet means positioned between
the
scrubber layer and the liquid impervious layer. The rupturable packets are so
located
such that upon rupture, fluid is directed onto the surface to be cleaned.
During the
cleaning action with the scrubber layer, the impervious sheet prevents fluid
from
moving to the absorbent blotter layer. After the cleaning action is completed,
the pad
is removed from the mop handle and reattached such that the blotter layer
contacts the
floor. While this device can alleviate the need to use multiple rinsing steps,
it does
require that the user physically handle the pad and reattach a soiled, damp
pad in order
to complete the cleaning process.
Similarly, U.S. Patent 5,419,015, issued May 30, 1995 to Garcia, describes a
mop having removable, washable work pads. The pad is described as comprising
an
upper layer which is capable of attaching to hooks on a mop head, a central
layer of
synthetic plastic microporous foam, and a lower layer for contacting a surface
during
the cleaning operation. The lower layer's composition is stated to depend on
the end-
use of the device, i.e., washing, polishing or scrubbing. While the reference
addresses
the problems associated with mops that require rinsing during use, the patent
fails to
provide a cleaning implement that sufficiently removes the soil deposited on
typical
household hard surfaces, in particular floors, such that the surface is
perceived as
essentially free of soil. In particular, the synthetic foam described by
Garcia for
absorbing the cleaning solution has a relatively low absorbent capacity for
water and
water-based solutions. As such, the user must either use small amounts of
cleaning
solution to remain within the absorbent capacity of the pad, or the user must
leave a
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-3-
significant amount of cleaning solution on the surface being cleaned. In
either
situation, the overall performance of the cleaning pad is not optimal.
While many known devices for cleaning hard surfaces are successful at
removing a vast majority of the soil encountered by the typical consumer
during the
cleaning process, they are inconvenient in that they require one or more
cleaning
steps. The prior art devices that have addressed the issue of convenience
typically do
so at the cost of cleaning performance. As such, there remains a need for a
device that
offers both convenience and beneficial soil removal.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
In one aspect, the present invention encompasses hard surface cleaning
compositions, preferably for use with the cleaning pads and/or cleaning
implements
described herein, comprising:
(a) optionally, from about 0.001% to about 0.5% by weight of the composition
of surfactant, preferably selected from the group consisting of
alkylpolysaccharides, alkyl ethoxylates, alkyl sulfonates, and mixtures
thereof;
(b) optionally, hydrophilic polymer, preferably less than about 0.5% by weight
of the composition;
(c) optionally, organic solvent, preferably from about 0.25% to about 7% by
weight of the composition and preferably having a boiling point of from
about 120 C to about 180 C;
(d) optionally, from about 0.01 % to about 1% by weight of the composition of
mono- or polycarboxylic acid;
(e) optionally, from about 0.01% to about 1% by weight of the composition of
odor control agent, preferably cyclodextrin;
(f) optionally, a source of peroxide, preferably from about 0.05% to about 5%
by weight of the composition and preferably selected from the group
consisting of benzoyl peroxide, hydrogen peroxide, and mixtures thereof;
(g) optionally, from. about 0.001 % to about 0.1 % by weight of the
composition
of thickening polymer;
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-4-
(h) aqueous solvent system, preferably at least about 80% by weight of the
composition;
(i) optionally, suds suppressor;
(j) optionally, from about 0.005% to about 0.2% by weight of the composition
of a perfume comprising:
(i) optionally, from about 0.05% to about 90% by weight of the
perfume of volatile, hydrophilic perfume material;
(ii) optionally, at least about 0.2% by weight of the perfume of volatile,
hydrophobic perfume material;
(iii) optionally, less than about 10% by weight of the perfume of
residual, hydrophilic perfume material;
(iv) less than about 10% by weight of the perfume of residual,
hydrophobic perfume material;
(k) optionally, a detergent adjuvant, preferably selected from the group
consisting of detergency builder, buffer, preservative, antibacterial agent,
colorant, bleaching agents, chelants, enzymes, hydrotropes, corrosion
inhibitors, and mixtures thereo~
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a cleaning pad, preferably
disposable, for cleaning a hard surface, the cleaning pad comprising:
(a) at least one absorbent layer;
(b) optionally, a liquid pervious scrubbing layer; wherein the liquid
pervious scrubbing layer is preferably an apertured formed film,
more preferably a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional
plastic web, having tapered or funnel-shaped apertures and/or
surface aberrations and preferably comprising a hydrophobic
material;
(c) optionally, an attachment layer, wherein the attachment layer
preferably comprises a clear or translucent material, more
preferably a clear or translucent polyethylene film, and wherein the
attachment layer preferably comprises loop and/or hook material
for attachment to a support head of a handle of a cleaning
implement;
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-5-
(d) optionally, multiple planar surfaces;
(e) optionally, at least one functional cuff, preferably at least one free-
floating, looped functional cuff;
(f) optionally, a density gradient throughout at least one absorbent
layer; wherein the density gradient preferably comprises a first
absorbent layer having a density of from about 0.01 g/cm3 to about
0.15 g/cm3, preferably from about 0.03 g/cm3 to about 0.1 g/cm3,
and more preferably from about 0.04 g/cm3 to about 0.06 g/cm3,
and a second absorbent layer having a density of from about 0.04
g/cm3 to about 0.2 g/cm3, preferably from about 0.1 g/cm3 to about
0.2 g/cm3, and more preferably from about 0.12 g/cm3 to about 0.17
g/cm3; wherein the density of the first absorbent layer is about 0.04
g/cm3, preferably about 0.07 g/cm3, and more preferably about 0.1
g/cm3, less than the density of the second absorbent layer;
(g) optionally, at least one adhesive scrubbing strip, preferably
comprising a material selected from the group consisting of nylon,
polyester, polypropylene, abrasive material, and mixtures thereof;
and
(h) optionally, perfume carrier complex, preferably selected from the
group consisting of cyclodextrin inclusion complex, matrix
perfume microcapsules, and mixtures thereof; wherein the perfume
carrier complex is preferably located in an absorbent layer.
Preferably, the cleaning pad has a 4200. absorbent capacity of at least about
5
grams/gram.
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a cleaning implement,
comprising:
a handle;
a support head pivotally attached to said handle;
a cleaning substrate removeably attached to the support head, wherein said
cleaning substrate has an absorbent capacity of at least about 5 g/g; and
i . i
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-6-
a liquid delivery system for providing a cleaning liquid to a surface to be
cleaned, wherein said liquid delivery system is configured to spray at least
about 2 mils/sec of a cleaning liquid.
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a method of cleaning a
hard
surface comprising:
(a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and
a removable, dry, cleaning substrate, preferably a nonwoven
hydroentangled cleaning sheet as described herein before, to remove dust
and fine particulate matter from the surface;
(b) contacting the surface with a hard surface cleaning composition,
preferably
a hard surface cleaning composition as described herein, to wet the
surface;
(c) contacting the wet surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle
and a removable cleaning pad, preferably a cleaning pad as described
herein, to substantially remove the hard surface cleaning composition from
the surface; and
(d) allowing the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate
rinse
solution.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Figure 1 is a perspective view of a cleaning pad of the present invention.
Figure 2 is a perspective view of a cleaning pad of the present invention.
Figure 3 is a blown perspective view of the absorbent layer of a cleaning pad
of the present invention.
Figure 4a is a plan view of a preferred cleaning pad of the present invention.
Figure 4b is a cross sectional view of the cleaning pad shown in Figure 4a.
Figure 5 is a perspective view of a preferred cleaning implement made in
accordance with the present invention.
Figure 6 is a top view of the cleaning implement of Figure 5.
Figure 7 is a side view of another preferred cleaning implement made in
accordance with the present invention, wherein the cleaning implement
comprises a
handle, mop head, and a hand-held sprayer stored within a cage.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-7-
Figure 7a is a side view of yet another preferred cleaning implement made in
accordance with the present invention, wherein the cleaning implement
comprises a
handle, mop head, and a hand-held sprayer stored within a cage having a
sleeve.
Figure 8A is a perspective view of yet another preferred cleaning implement
made in accordance with the present invention, wherein the cleaning implement
comprises a plurality of attachment structures.
Figure 8B is a perspective view of the cleaning implement of Figure 8A with a
cleaning pad attached to the mop head of the implement;
Figure 9 is a schematic illustration of a liquid delivery system suitable for
use
with the cleaning implement of Figure 5.
Figure 10 is an illustration of a spray pattern from the cleaning implement of
Figure 5.
Figure 11 is a plot of exemplary voltages, volumetric flow rates, and spray
nozzle inlet pressures as a function of continuous pump operation for a
cleaning
implement made in accordance with the present invention.
Figure 12 is a schematic illustration of a test setup suitable for measuring
mop
handle deflection.
Figures 13 and 13A are schematic illustrations of test setups suitable for
determining Spray Pattern dimensions.
Figure 14 represents a schematic view of an apparatus for measuring the
Performance Under Pressure (PUP) capacity of a cleaning pad.
Figure 15 represents an enlarged sectional view of the piston/cylinder
assembly shown in Figure 14.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Reference will now be made in detail to the present preferred embodiments of
the invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings
wherein like numerals indicate the same elements throughout the views and
wherein
reference numerals having the same last two digits (e.g., 20 and 120) connote
similar
elements.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-8-
I. Definitions
As used herein, the term "comprising" means that the various components,
ingredients, or steps, can be conjointly employed in practicing the present
invention.
Accordingly, the term "comprising" encompasses the more restrictive tenms
"consisting essentially of' and "consisting of."
As used herein, the term "direct fluid communication" means that fluid can
transfer readily between two cleaning pad components or layers (e.g., the
scrubbing
layer and the absorbent layer) without substantial accumulation, transport, or
restriction by an interposed layer. For example, tissues, nonwoven webs,
construction
adhesives, and the like can be present between the two distinct components
while
maintaining "direct fluid communication", as long as they do not substantially
impede
or restrict fluid as it passes from one component or layer to another.
As used herein, the term "macroscopically expanded", when used to describe
three-dimensional plastic webs, ribbons, and films, refers to webs, ribbons,
and films
which have been caused to conform to the surface of a three-dimensional
forming
structure so that both surfaces thereof exhibit the three-dimensional pattern
of said
forming structure, said pattern being readily visible to the naked eye when
the
perpendicular distance between the viewer's eye and the plane of the web is
about 12
inches. Such macroscopically expanded webs, ribbons and films are typically
caused
to conform to the surface of said forming structures by embossing, i.e., when
the
forming structure exhibits a pattern comprised primarily of male projections,
by
debossing, i.e., when the forming structure exhibits a pattern comprised
primarily of
female capillary networks, or by extrusion of a resinous melt directly onto
the surface
of a forming structure of either type. By way of contrast, the term "planar",
when
utilized herein to describe plastic webs, ribbons and films, refers to the
overall
condition of the web, ribbon or film when viewed by the naked eye on a
macroscopic
scale. In this context, "planar" webs, ribbons and films can include webs,
ribbons and
films having fine scale surface aberrations on one or both sides, said surface
aberrations not being readily visible to the naked eye when the perpendicular
distance
between the viewer's eye and the plane of the web is about 12 inches or
greater.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-9-
As used herein, the term "z-dimension" refers to the dimension orthogonal to
the length and width of the cleaning pad of the present invention, or a
component
thereof. The z-dimension therefore corresponds to the thickness of the
cleaning pad
or a pad component.
As used herein, the term "x-y dimension" refers to the plane orthogonal to the
thickness of the cleaning pad, or a component thereof. The x and y dimensions
correspond to the length and width, respectively, of the cleaning pad or a pad
component. In general, when the cleaning pad is used in conjunction with a
handle,
the implement will be moved in a direction parallel to the y-dimension (or
width) of
the pad. (See Figure 1, and the discussion below.) Of course, the present
invention is
not limited to cleaning pads having four sides. Other shapes, such as
circular,
elliptical, and the like, can also be used. When determining the width of the
pad at
any point in the z-dimension, it is understood that the pad is assessed
according to its
intended use.
As used herein, the term "layer" refers to a member or component of a
cleaning pad whose primary dimension is x-y, i.e., along its length and width.
It
should be understood that the term layer is not necessarily limited to single
layers or
sheets of material. Thus a layer can comprise laminates or combinations of
several
sheets or webs of the requisite type of materials. Accordingly, the term
"layer"
includes the terms "layers" and "layered."
As used herein, the term "hydrophilic" is used to refer to surfaces that are
wettable by aqueous fluids deposited thereon. Hydrophilicity and wettability
are
typically defined in terms of contact angle and the surface tension of the
fluids and
solid surfaces involved. This is discussed in detail in the American Chemical
Society
publication entitled Contact Angle, Wettability and Adhesion, edited by Robert
F.
Gould (Copyright 1964). A surface is said to be wetted by a fluid (i.e.,
hydrophilic)
when either the contact angle between the fluid and the surface is less than
90 , or
when the fluid tends to spread spontaneously across the surface, both
conditions
normally co-existing. Conversely, a surface is considered to be "hydrophobic"
if the
contact angle is greater than 90 and the fluid does not spread spontaneously
across
the surface.
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-10-
As used herein, the term "scrim" means any durable material that provides
texture to the surface-contacting side of the cleaning pad's scrubbing layer,
and also
has a sufficient degree of openness to allow the requisite movement of fluid
to the
absorbent layer of the cleaning pad. Suitable materials include materials that
have a
continuous, open structure, such as synthetic and wire mesh screens. The open
areas
of these materials can be readily controlled by varying the number of
interconnected
strands that comprise the mesh, by controlling the thickness of those
interconnected
strands, etc. Other suitable materials include those where texture is provided
by a
discontinuous pattern printed on a substrate. In this aspect, a durable
material (e.g., a
synthetic) can be printed on a substrate in a continuous or discontinuous
pattern, such
as individual dots and/or lines, to provide the requisite texture. Similarly,
the
continuous or discontinuous pattern can be printed onto a release material
that will
then act as the scrim. These patterns can be repeating or they can be random.
It will
be understood that one or more of the approaches described for providing the
desired
texture can be combined to form the optional scrim material. The z direction
height
and open area of the scrim and or scrubbing substrate layer help to control
and or
retard the flow of liquid into the absorbent core material. The z height of
the scrim
and or scrubbing substrate help provide a means of controlling the volume of
liquid in
contact with the cleaning surface while at the same time controlling the rate
of liquid
absorption, fluid communication into the absorption core material.
For purposes of the present invention, an "upper" layer of a cleaning pad is a
layer that is relatively further away from the surface that is to be cleaned
(i.e., in the
implement context, relatively closer to the implement handle during use). The
term
"lower" layer conversely means a layer of a cleaning pad that is relatively
closer to the
surface that is to be cleaned (i.e., in the implement context, relatively
further away
from the implement handle during use). As such, the scrubbing layer is
preferably the
lower-most layer and the absorbent layer is preferably an upper layer relative
to the
scrubber layer. The terms "upper" and "lower" are similarly used when
referring to
layers that are multi-ply (e.g., when the scrubbing layer is a two-ply
material). In
terms of sequential ordering of layers (e.g., first layer, second layer, and
third layer), a
first layer is a "lower" layer relative to a second layer. Conversely, a third
layer is an
"upper" layer relative to a second layer. The terms "above" and "below" are
used to
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-11-
describe relative locations of two or more materials in a cleaning pad's
thickness. By
way of illustration, a material A is "above" material B if material B is
positioned
closer to the scrubbing layer than material A. Similarly, material B is
"below"
material A in this illustration.
All parts, ratios, and percentages herein, in the Specification, Examples, and
Claims, are by weight and all numerical limits are used with the normal degree
of
accuracy afforded by the art, unless otherwise specified.
II. Hard Surface Cleanin,g Composition
In one aspect, the present invention encompasses hard surface cleaning
compositions, preferably for use with the cleaning pads and/or cleaning
implements
described herein, comprising:
(a) optionally, from about 0.001% to about 0.5% by weight of the composition
of surfactant, preferably selected from the group consisting of
alkylpolysaccharides, alkyl ethoxylates, alkyl sulfonates, and mixtures
thereof;
(b) optionally, hydrophilic polymer, preferably less than about 0.5% by weight
of the composition;
(c) optionally, organic solvent, preferably from about 0.25% to about 7% by
weight of the composition and preferably having a boiling point of from
about 120 C to about 180 C;
(d) optionally, from about 0.01% to about 1% by weight of the composition of
mono- or polycarboxylic acid;
(e) optionally, from about 0.01 % to about 1% by weight of the composition of
odor control agent, preferably cyclodextrin;
(f) optionally, a source of peroxide, preferably from about 0.05% to about 5%
by weight of the composition and preferably selected from the group
consisting of benzoyl peroxide, hydrogen peroxide, and mixtures thereof;
(g) optionally, from about 0.001 % to about 0.1 % by weight of the composition
of thickening polymer;
(h) aqueous solvent system, preferably at least about 80% by weight of the
composition;
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-12-
(i) optionally, suds suppressor;
(j) optionally, from about 0.005% to about 0.2% by weight of the composition
of a perfume comprising:
(i) optionally, from about 0.05% to about 90% by weight of the
perfume of volatile, hydrophilic perfume material;
(ii) optionally, at least about 0.2% by weight of the perfume of volatile,
hydrophobic perfume material;
(iii) optionally, less than about 10% by weight of the perfume of
residual, hydrophilic perfume material;
(iv) less than about 10% by weight of the perfume of residual,
hydrophobic perfume material;
(k) optionally, a detergent adjuvant, preferably selected from the group
consisting of detergency builder, buffer, preservative, antibacterial agent,
colorant, bleaching agents, chelants, enzymes, hydrotropes, corrosion
inhibitors, and mixtures thereof.
A. Optional Surfactant
When a hydrophilic polymer, as described below, is not present in the hard
surface cleaning compositions herein, the compositions will normally have one
of the
preferred surfactants present. A preferred surfactant for use herein are the
alkylpolysaccharides that are disclosed in U.S. Patents: 5,776,872, Cleansing
compositions, issued July 7, 1998, to Giret, Michel Joseph; Langlois, Anne;
and
Duke, Roland Philip; 5,883,059, Three in one ultra mild lathering
antibacterial liquid
personal cleansing composition, issued March 16, 1999, to Furman, Christopher
Allen; Giret, Michel Joseph; and Dunbar, James Charles; etc.; 5,883,062,
Manual
dishwashing compositions, issued March 16, 1999, to Addison, Michael Crombie;
Foley, Peter Robert; and Allsebrook, Andrew Micheal; and 5,906,973, issued May
25,
1999, Process for cleaning vertical or inclined hard surfaces, by Ouzounis,
Dimitrios
and Nierhaus, Wolfgang.
Suitable alkylpolysaccharides for use herein are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
4,565,647, Llenado, issued Jan. 21, 1986, having a hydrophobic group
containing
from about 6 to about 30 carbon atoms, preferably from about 10 to about 16
carbon
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-13-
atoms and a polysaccharide, e.g., a polyglycoside, hydrophilic group. For
acidic or
alkaline cleaning compositions/solutions suitable for use in no-rinse methods,
the
preferred alkyl polysaccharide preferably comprises a broad distribution of
chain
lengths, as these provide the best combination of wetting, cleaning, and low
residue
upon drying. This "broad distribution" is defined by at least about 50% of the
chainlength mixture comprising from about 10 carbon atoms to about 16 carbon
atoms. Preferably, the alkyl group of the alkyl polysaccharide consists of a
mixtures
of chainlength, preferably from about 6 to about 18 carbon atoms, more
preferably
from about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms, and hydrophilic group containing from
about
one to about 1.5 saccharide, preferably glucoside, groups per molecule. This
"broad
chainlength distribution" is defined by at least about 50% of the chainlength
mixture
comprising from about 10 carbon atoms to about 16 carbon atoms. A broad
mixture
of chain lengths, particularly C8-C16, is highly desirable relative to
narrower range
chain length mixtures, and particularly versus lower (i.e., C8-C10 or C8-C12)
chainlength alkyl polyglucoside mixtures. It is also found that the preferred
C8_16
alkyl polyglucoside provides much improved perfume solubility versus lower and
narrower chainlength alkyl polyglucosides, as well as other preferred
surfactants,
including the C8-C14 alkyl ethoxylates. Any reducing saccharide containing 5
or 6
carbon atoms can be used, e.g., glucose, galactose and galactosyl moieties can
be
substituted for the glucosyl moieties. (optionally the hydrophobic group is
attached at
the 2-, 3-, 4-, etc. positions thus giving a glucose or galactose as opposed
to a
glucoside or galactoside.) The intersaccharide bonds can be, e.g., between the
one
position of the additional saccharide units and the 2-, 3-, 4-, and/or 6-
positions on the
preceding saccharide units. The glycosyl is preferably derived from glucose.
Optionally, and less desirably, there can be a polyalkyleneoxide chain joining
the hydrophobic moiety and the polysaccharide moiety. The preferred
alkyleneoxide
is ethylene oxide. Typical hydrophobic groups include alkyl groups, either
saturated or
unsaturated, branched or unbranched containing from 8 to 18, preferably from
10 to
16, carbon atoms. Preferably, the alkyl group is a straight-chain saturated
alkyl group.
The alkyl group can contain up to about 3 hydroxyl groups and/or the
polyalkyleneoxide chain can contain up to about 10, preferably less than 5,
alkyleneoxide moieties. Suitable alkyl polysaccharides are octyl, nonyldecyl,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-14-
undecyldodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hexadecyl, heptadecyl, and
octadecyl,
di-, tri-, tetra-, penta-, and hexaglucosides and/ or galatoses. Suitable
mixtures include
coconut alkyl, di-, tri-, tetra-, and pentaglucosides and tallow alkyl tetra-,
penta- and
hexaglucosides.
To prepare these compounds, the alcohol or alkylpolyethoxy alcohol is formed
first and then reacted with glucose, or a source of glucose, to form the
glucoside
(attachment at the 1-position). The additional glycosyl units can then be
attached
between their 1-position and the preceding glycosyl units 2-,3-, 4- and/or 6-
position,
preferably predominantly the 2-position.
In the alkyl polyglycosides, the alkyl moieties can be derived from the usual
sources like fats, oils or chemically produced alcohols while their sugar
moieties are
created from hydrolyzed polysaccharides. Alkyl polyglycosides are the
condensation
product of fatty alcohol and sugars like glucose with the number of glucose
units
defining the relative hydrophilicity. As discussed above, the sugar units can
additionally be alkoxylated either before or after reaction with the fatty
alcohols.
Such alkyl polyglycosides are described in detail in WO 86/05199 for example.
Technical alkyl polyglycosides are generally not molecularly uniform products,
but
represent mixtures of alkyl groups and mixtures of monosaccharides and
different
oligosaccharides. Alkyl polyglycosides (also sometimes referred to as "APG's")
are
preferred for the purposes of the invention since they provide additional
improvement
in surface appearance relative to other surfactants. The glycoside moieties
are
preferably glucose moieties. The alkyl substituent is preferably a saturated
or
unsaturated alkyl moiety containing from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms,
preferably
from about 8 to about 10 carbon atoms or a mixture of such alkyl moieties. C8-
C16
alkyl polyglucosides are commercially available (e.g., Simusol surfactants
from
Seppic Corporation, 75 Quai d'Orsay, 75321 Paris, Cedex 7, France, and
Glucopon8425 available from Henkel. However, it has been found that purity of
the
alkyl polyglucoside can also impact performance, particularly end result for
certain
applications, including daily shower product technology. In the present
invention, the
preferred alkyl polyglucosides are those which have been purified enough for
use in
personal cleansing. Most preferred are "cosmetic grade" alkyl polyglucosides,
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-15-
particularly C8 to C16 alkyl polyglucosides, such as Plantaren 2000 ,
Plantaren 2000
N , and Plantaren 2000 N UP , available from Henkel Corporation (Postfach
101100, D 40191 Dusseldorf, Germany).
In the context of floor, counter, wall, etc. applications, another class of
preferred nonionic surfactant is alkyl ethoxylates. The alkyl ethoxylates of
the present
invention are either linear or branched, and contain from about 8 carbon atoms
to
about 14 carbon atoms, and from about 3 ethylene oxide units to about 25
ethylene
oxide units. Examples of alkyl ethoxylates include Neodol 91-6, Neodol 91-8
supplied by the Shell Corporation (P.O. Box 2463, 1 Shell Plaza, Houston,
Texas),
and Alfonic 810-60 supplied by Vista corporation, (900 Threadneedle P.O. Box
19029, Houston, TX). More preferred surfactants are the alkyl ethoxylates
comprising
from about 9 to about 12 carbon atoms, and from about 4 to about 8 ethylene
oxide
units. These surfactants offer excellent cleaning benefits and work
synergistically
with the required hydrophilic polymers. A most preferred alkyl ethoxylate is C
1IEO5,
available from the Shell Chemical Company under the trademark Neodol 1-5.
Combinations of alkyl ethoxylates of varying chainlengths and/or degree of
ethoxylation can also be used, such as Neodol 1-3 with Neodol 1-7. These alkyl
ethoxyaltes are found to provide desirable wetting and cleaning properties,
and can be
advantageously combined with the preferred C8_16 alkyl polyglucoside in a
matrix that
includes the wetting polymers of the present invention. While not wishing to
be
limited by theory, it is believed that the C8_16 alkyl polyglucoside can
provide a
superior end result (i.e., reduce hazing) in compositions that additionally
contain the
preferred alkyl ethoxylate particularly when the preferred alkyl ethoxylate is
required
for superior cleaning. The preferred the C8_16 alkyl polyglucoside is also
found to
improve perfume solubility of compositions comprising alkyl ethoxylates.
Higher
levels of perfume can be advantageous for consumer acceptance.
The usage of liquid compositions according to the present invention are
prepared with relatively low levels of active. Typically, compositions will
comprise
sufficient surfactant and optional solvent, as discussed hereinafter, to be
effective as
hard surface cleaners yet remain economical; accordingly they typically
contain from
about 0.002% to about 0.5% by weight of the composition of surfactant,
preferably
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-16-
alkylpolyglycoside and/or C8_14 alkylethoxylate surfactant, more preferably
from about
0.004% to about 0.4% surfactant, and even more preferably from about 0.01% to
about 0.3% surfactant. It has been found that use of low, rather than high
levels of
surfactant are advantageous to overall end result performance. It is also been
found
that when the primary surfactant system includes preferred alkyl ethoxylates
that end
result hazing is mitigated by specific cosurfactants. These preferred
cosurfactants are
C8 sulfonate and Poly-Tergent CS-1.
The liquid compositions of the present invention optionally can include a
small amount of additional anionic and/or nonionic detergent surfactant. Such
anionic
surfactants typically comprise a hydrophobic chain containing from about 8
carbon
atoms to about 18, preferably from about 8 to about 16, carbon atoms, and
typically
include a sulfate, sulfonate, or carboxylate hydrophilic head group. In
general, the
level of optional, e.g., anionic, surfactants in the compositions herein is
from about
0.001% to about 0.25%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.2%, most
preferably from about 0.01 % to about 0.1 %, by weight of the composition.
In the context of floor, counter and other surface applications, the choice of
cosurfactant can be critical in both selection of type and level. In
compositions
comprising C8-C14 alkyl ethoxylates, it is found that low levels of C8
sulfonate can
improve end result by providing a "toning" effect. By toning, it is meant an
improvement in the visual appearance of the end result, due to less haziness.
If
present, the C8 sulfonate is preferably used in from about 1:10 to about 1:1
weight
ratio with respect to the primary surfactant(s). C8 sulfonate is commercially
available
from Stepan under the tradename Bio-Terge PAS-8 as well as from the Witco
Corporation under the tradename Witconate NAS-8 . Another outstanding "toning"
surfactant of benefit to the present invention is Poly-Tergent CS-1 which can
be
purchased from BASF. If present, the Poly-Tergent CS-1 is preferably used in
from
about 1:20 to about I:1 weight ratio with respect to the primary
surfactant(s).
Other surfactants which can be used, though less preferably, and typically at
very low levels, include C8-C18 alkyl sulfonates (Hostapur SAS from Hoechst,
Aktiengesellschaft, D-6230 Frankfurt, Germany), Cio-C14 linear or branched
alkyl
benzene sulfonates, C9-C15 alkyl ethoxy carboxylates detergent surfactant
(Neodox
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-17-
surfactants available from Shell Chemical Corporation), C10_14 alkyl sulfates
and
ethoxysulfates (e.g., Stepanol AM from Stepan). Alkyl ethoxy carboxylates can
be
advantageously used at extremely low levels (about 0.01% or lower) to dissolve
perfume. This can be an important benefit given the low levels of active
needed for
the present invention to be most effective. Other anionic, nonionic, or
zwitterionic
surfactants can also be useful as primary surfactants and/or co-surfactants in
the
present compositions, such as the betaines, examples being cocoamidopropyl
betaine
(e.g., Lonzaine C from Lonza), Cetyl betaine (e.g., Lonzaine 16SP from Lonza),
hydroxysultaines (e.g., Mirataine CBS from Rhone-Poulenc), sulfobetaines
(e.g.,
Rewoteric AM CAS-15 from Witco), sulfosuccinates (e.g., Aerosol OT from
American Cyanamid) or amine oxides (e.g., Barlox 14 or Barlox C from
Lonzaine).
Alternative nonionic detergent surfactants for use herein are alkoxylated
alcohols generally comprising from about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms in the
hydrophobic alkyl chain of the alcohol. Typical alkoxylation groups are
propoxy
groups or propoxy groups in combination with ethoxy groups. Such compounds are
commercially available under the tradename Antarox available from Rhodia
(P.O.
Box 425 Cranberry, New Jersey 08512) with a wide variety of chain length and
alkoxylation degrees. Block copolymers of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide
can
also be used and are available from BASF under the tradename Pluronic .
Preferred
nonionic detergent surfactants for use herein are according to the formula
R(X)nH,
were R is an alkyl chain having from about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms,
preferably
from about 8 to about 12, X is a propoxy, or a mixture of ethoxy and propoxy
groups,
n is an integer of from about 4 to about 30, preferably from about 5 to about
8. Other
non-ionic surfactants that can be used include those derived from natural
sources such
as sugars and include C8-C16 N-alkyl glucose amide surfactants. If present,
the
concentration of alternative nonionic surfactant is from about 0.01% to about
0.2%,
more preferably from about 0.01 % to about 0.1 %, by weight of the
composition.
Other surfactants useful in the present hard surface cleaning compositions
include those described in U.S. No. Patent 6,008,181 issued December 28, 1999;
U.S.
Patent No. 6,020,303 issued February 1, 2000; U.S. Patent 6,093,856 issued
July 25,
2000; published application W099/19,448; and published application
W099/19,449.
I. I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-18-
B. Optional Hydrophilic Polymer
In preferred embodiments of the invention, polymeric material that improves
the hydrophilicity of the surface being treated is incorporated into the
present
compositions. The increase in hydrophilicity provides improved final
appearance by
providing "sheeting" of the water from the surface and/or spreading of the
water on
the surface, and this effect is preferably seen when the surface is rewetted
and even
when subsequently dried after the rewetting.
"Sheeting" effects have been noted on a variety of surfaces such as glass,
ceramic and even tougher to wet surfaces such as porcelain enamel. When the
water
"sheets" evenly off the surface and/or spreads on the surface, it minimizes
the
formation of, e.g., "hard water spots" that form upon drying. For a product
intended
to be used in the context of a floor cleaner, the polymer improves surface
wetting and
assists cleaning performance.
Polymer substantivity is beneficial as it prolongs the sheeting and cleaning
benefits. Another important feature of preferred polymers is lack of residue
upon
drying. Compositions comprising preferred polymers dry more evenly on floors
while
promoting an end result with little or no haze.
Many materials can provide the sheeting and anti-spotting benefits, but the
preferred materials are polymers that contain amine oxide hydrophilic groups.
Polymers that contain other hydrophilic groups such a sulfonate, pyrrolidone,
and/or
carboxylate groups can also be used. Examples of desirable poly-sulfonate
polymers
include polyvinylsulfonate, and more preferably polystyrene sulfonate, such as
those
sold by Monomer-Polymer Dajac (1675 Bustleton Pike, Feasterville, Pennsylvania
19053). A typical formula is as follows.
-[CH(C6H4SO3Na) - CH2]n- CH(C6H5) - CH2 -
wherein n is a number to give the appropriate molecular weight as disclosed
below.
Typical molecular weights are from about 10,000 to about 1,000,000, preferably
from about 200,000 to about 700,000. Preferred polymers containing pyrrolidone
functionalities include polyvinyl pyrrolidone, quaternized pyrrolidone
derivatives
(such as Gafquat 755N from International Specialty Products), and co-polymers
containing pyrrolidone, such as polyvinylpyrrolidone
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-19-
/dimethylaminoethylmethacrylate (available from ISP) and polyvinyl
pyrrolidone/acrylate (available from BASF). Other materials can also provide
substantivity and hydrophilicity including cationic materials that also
contain
hydrophilic groups and polymers that contain multiple ether linkages. Cationic
materials include cationic sugar and/or starch derivatives and the typical
block
copolymer detergent surfactants based on mixtures of polypropylene oxide and
ethylene oxide are representative of the polyether materials. The polyether
materials
are less substantive, however.
The preferred polymers comprise water soluble amine oxide moieties. It is
believed that the partial positive charge of the amine oxide group can act to
adhere the
polymer to the surface of the surface substrate, thus allowing water to
"sheet" more
readily. The amine oxide moiety can also hydrogen-bond with hard surface
substrates,
such as ceramic tile, glass, fiberglass, porcelain enamel, linoleum, no-wax
tile, and
other hard surfaces commonly encountered in consumer homes. To the extent that
polymer anchoring promotes better "sheeting" higher molecular materials are
preferred. Increased molecular weight improves efficiency and effectiveness of
the
amine oxide-based polymer. The preferred polymers of this invention have one
or
more monomeric units containing at least one N-oxide group. At least about
10%,
preferably more than about 50%, more preferably greater than about 90% of said
monomers forming said polymers contain an amine oxide group. These polymers
can
be described by the general formula:
P(B)
wherein each P is selected from homopolymerizable and copolymerizable moieties
which attach to form the polymer backbone, preferably vinyl moieties, e.g.
C(R)2 --
C(R)2, wherein each R is H, C1 -C12 (preferably Cl -C4) alkyl(ene),
C6 -C12
aryl(ene) and/or B; B is a moiety selected from substituted and unsubstituted,
linear
and cyclic C, -C12 alkyl, Ci-C12 alkylene, CI-C12 heterocyclic, aromatic C6-
C12 groups
and wherein at least one of said B moieties has at least one amine oxide (--N--
>O)
group present; u is from a number that will provide at least about 10%
monomers
containing an amine oxide group to about 90%; and t is a number such that the
average molecular weight of the polymer is from about 2,000 to about 500,000,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-20-
preferably from about 5,000 to about 250,000, and more preferably from about
7,500
to about 200,000.
The preferred polymers of this invention possess the unexpected property of
being substantive without leaving a visible residue that would render the
surface
substrate unappealing to consumers. The preferred polymers include poly(4-
vinylpyridine N-oxide) polymers (PVNO), e.g. those formed by polymerization of
monomers that include the following moiety:
0
t
N
~
~
\
wherein the average molecular weight of the polymer is from about 2,000 to
about
500,000 preferably from about 5,000 to about 400,000, and more preferably from
about 7,500 to about 300,000. In general, higher molecular weight polymers are
preferred. Often, higher molecular weight polymers allow for use of lower
levels of
the wetting polymer, which can provide benefits in floor cleaner applications.
The
desirable molecular weight range of polymers useful in the present invention
stands in
contrast to that found in the art relating to polycarboxylate, polystyrene
sulfonate, and
polyether based additives which prefer molecular weights in the range of
400,000 to
1,500,000. Lower molecular weights for the preferred poly-amine oxide polymers
of
the present invention are due to greater difficulty in manufacturing these
polymers in
higher molecular weight.
The level of amine oxide polymer will normally be less than about 0.5%,
preferably from about 0.001% to about 0.4%, more preferably from about 0.01%
to
about 0.3%, by weight of the end use composition/solution.
Some non-limiting examples of homopolymers and copolymers which can be
used as water soluble polymers of the present invention are: adipic
acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymer; adipic
acid/epoxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymer; polyvinyl alcohol; methacryloyl
ethyl
betaine/methacrylates copolymer; ethyl acrylate/methyl
methacrylate/methacrylic
acid/acrylic acid copolymer; polyamine resins; and polyquaternary amine
resins;
poly(ethenylformamide); poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; poly(vinyl alcohol-co-
6%
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-21 -
vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6%
vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine
hydrochloride). Preferably, said copolymer and/or homopolymers are selected
from
the group consisting of adipic acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl
diethylenetriamine
copolymer; poly(vinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate); polyvinyl
alcohol; ethyl acrylate/methyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid
copolymer;
methacryloyl ethyl betaine/methacrylates copolymer; polyquaternary amine
resins;
poly(ethenylformamide); poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; poly(vinyl alcohol-co-
6%
vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6%
vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine
hydrochloride).
Polymers useful in the present invention can be selected from the group
consisting of copolymers of hydrophilic monomers. The polymer can be linear
random or block copolymers, and mixtures thereof. The term "hydrophilic" is
used
herein consistent with its standard meaning of having affinity for water. As
used
herein in relation to monomer units and polymeric materials, including the
copolymers, "hydrophilic" means substantially water soluble. In this regard,
"substantially water soluble" shall refer to a material that is soluble in
distilled (or
equivalent) water, at 25 C, at a concentration of about 0.2% by weight, and
are
preferably soluble at about 1% by weight. The terms "soluble", "solubility"
and the
like, for purposes hereof, correspond to the maximum concentration of monomer
or
polymer, as applicable, that can dissolve in water or other solvents to form a
homogeneous solution, as is well understood to those skilled in the art.
Nonlimiting examples of useful hydrophilic monomers are unsaturated organic
mono- and polycarboxylic acids, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid,
crotonic acid,
maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid; unsaturated alcohols, such as
vinyl
alcohol, allyl alcohol; polar vinyl heterocyclics, such as, vinyl caprolactam,
vinyl
pyridine, vinyl imidazole; vinyl amine; vinyl sulfonate; unsaturated amides,
such as
acrylamides, e.g., N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide; hydroxyethyl
methacrylate; dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate; salts of acids and amines
listed
above; and the like; and mixtures thereof Some preferred hydrophilic monomers
are
acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, N,N-dimethyl acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl
I I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-22-
methacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, dimethylamino ethyl methacrylate,
thereof, and
mixtures thereof.
Polycarboxylate polymers are those formed by polymerization of monomers, at
least some of which contain carboxylic functionality. Common monomers include
acrylic acid, maleic acid, ethylene, vinyl pyrrolidone, methacrylic acid,
methacryloylethylbetaine, etc. Preferred polymers for substantivity are those
having
higher molecular weights. For example, polyacrylic acid having molecular
weights
below about 10,000 are not particularly substantive and therefore do not
normally
provide hydrophilicity for three rewettings with all compositions, although
with
higher levels and/or certain surfactants like amphoteric and/or zwitterionic
detergent
surfactants, molecular weights down to about 1000 can provide some results. In
general, the polymers should have molecular weights of more than about 10,000,
preferably more than about 20,000, more preferably more than about 300,000,
and
even more preferably more than about 400,000. It has also been found that
higher
molecular weight polymers, e.g., those having molecular weights of more than
about
3,000,000, are extremely difficult to formulate and are less effective in
providing anti-
spotting benefits than lower molecular weight polymers. Accordingly, the
molecular
weight should normally be, especially for polyacrylates, from about 20,000 to
about
3,000,000; preferably from about 20,000 to about 2,500,000; more preferably
from
about 300,000 to about 2,000,000; and even more preferably from about 400,000
to
about 1,500,000.
An advantage for some polycarboxylate polymers is the detergent builder
effectiveness of such polymers. Although such polymers do hurt
filming/streaking,
like other detergent builders, they provide increased cleaning effectiveness
on typical,
common "hard-to-remove" soils that contain particulate matter.
Some polymers, especially polycarboxylate polymers, thicken the compositions
that are aqueous liquids. This can be desirable. However, when the
compositions are
placed in containers with trigger spray devices or with cleaning implements
comprising a liquid delievery system as described hereinafter in Section V.A,
the
compositions are desirably not so thick as to require excessive trigger
pressure or
pump pressure. Typically, the viscosity under shear should be less than about
200 cp,
preferably less than about 100 cp, more preferably less than about 50 cp.
õ. ,
.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-23-
Non limiting examples of polymers for use in the present invention include the
following: poly(vinyl pyrrolidone/acrylic acid) sold under the name
"Acrylidone" by
ISP and poly(acrylic acid) sold under the name "Accumer" by Rohm & Haas.
Other
suitable materials include sulfonated polystyrene polymers sold under the name
Versaflex sold by National Starch and Chemical Company, especially Versaflex
7000.
The level of polymeric material will normally be less than about 0.5%,
preferably from about 0.001% to about 0.4%, more preferably from about 0.01%
to
about 0.3%. In general, lower molecular weight materials such as lower
molecular
weight poly(acrylic acid), e.g., those having molecular weights below about
10,000,
and especially about 2,000, do not provide good anti-spotting benefits upon
rewetting,
especially at the lower levels, e.g., about 0.02%. One should use only the
more
effective materials at the lower levels. In order to use lower molecular
weight
materials, substantivity should be increased, e.g., by adding groups that
provide
improved attachment to the surface, such as cationic groups, or the materials
should
be used at higher levels, e.g., more than about 0.05.
C. Optional Organic Solvent
The compositions, optionally, can also contain one, or more, organic cleaning
solvents at effective levels, typically no less than about 0.25%, and, at
least about, in
increasing order of preference, about 0.5% and about 3.0%, and no more than
about,
in increasing order of preference, about 7% and about 5% by weight of the
composition.
The surfactant provides cleaning and/ or wetting even without a hydrophobic
cleaning solvent present. However, the cleaning can normally be further
improved by
the use of the right organic cleaning solvent. By organic cleaning solvent, it
is meant
an agent which assists the surfactant to remove soils such as those commonly
encountered in the kitchen or bathroom. The organic cleaning solvent also can
participate in the building of viscosity, if needed, in increasing the
stability of the
composition, and/or enhancing the wetting properties of the cleaning solution.
The
compositions containing C8_16 alkyl polyglucosides and C8_14 alkylethoxylates
also
have lower sudsing when the solvent is present. Thus, the suds profile can be
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-24-
controlled in large part by simply controlling the level of hydrophobic
solvent in the
formulation.
Such solvents typically have a terminal C3-C6 hydrocarbon attached to from
one to three ethylene glycol or propylene glycol moieties to provide the
appropriate
degree of hydrophobicity and, preferably, surface activity. Examples of
commercially
available hydrophobic cleaning solvents based on ethylene glycol chemistry
include
mono-ethylene glycol n-hexyl ether (Hexyl Cellosolve available from Union
Carbide). Examples of commercially available hydrophobic cleaning solvents
based
on propylene glycol chemistry include the di-, and tri-propylene glycol
derivatives of
propyl and butyl alcohol, which are available from Arco Chemical, 3801 West
Chester
Pike, Newtown Square, PA 19073) and Dow Chemical (1691 N. Swede Road,
Midland, Michigan) under the trade names Arcosolv and Dowanol .
In the context of the present invention, preferred solvents are selected from
the
group consisting of mono-propylene glycol mono-propyl ether, di-propylene
glycol
mono-propyl ether, mono-propylene glycol mono-butyl ether, di-propylene glycol
mono-propyl ether, di-propylene glycol mono-butyl ether; tri-propylene glycol
mono-
butyl ether; ethylene glycol mono-butyl ether; di-ethylene glycol mono-butyl
ether,
ethylene glycol mono-hexyl ether and di-ethylene glycol mono-hexyl ether, 3-
methoxy-3-methyl-butanol, and mixtures thereof. "Butyl" includes both normal
butyl,
isobutyl and tertiary butyl groups. Mono-propylene glycol and mono-propylene
glycol
mono-butyl ether are the most preferred cleaning solvent and are available
under the
tradenames Dowanol DPnP and Dowanol DPnB . Di-propylene glycol mono-t-
butyl ether is commercially available from Arco Chemical under the tradename
Arcosolv PTB . In some instances, it might be preferred to use combinations of
these cleaning solvents, such as Hexyl cellusolve with Butyl cellusolve, or
Dowanol
PnB with 3-methoxy-3-methyl-butanol.
Highly preferred solvents for incorporation in the present compositions are
selected based upon the boiling point of the solvent in order to minimize the
filming
and/or streaking left on the surface being cleaned. It has been found that
solvents
having a boiling point of at least about 120 C, preferably at least about 130
C, more
preferably at least about 140 C, and no greater than about 180 C, preferably
no
I - 1
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-25-
greater than about 170 C, more preferably no greater than about 160 C, exhibit
excellent results in terms of minimizing the filming and/or streaking left
behind on a
treated surface, especially in a no-rinse cleaning method. A highly preferred
solvent
for incorporation in the present compositions is a glycol ether solvent having
a boiling
point of about 140 C to about 160 C.
The amount of organic cleaning solvent can vary depending on the amount of
other ingredients present in the composition. The hydrophobic cleaning solvent
is
normally helpful in providing good cleaning, such as in floor cleaner
applications.
D. Optional Mono- and Polycarboxylic Acids
For purposes of soap scum and hard water stain removal and/or prevention, the
compositions can be made acidic with a pH of from about 2 to about 5, more
preferably about 3. Acidity is accomplished, at least in part, through the use
of one or
more organic acids that have a pKa of less than about 5, preferably less than
about 4.
Such organic acids also can assist in phase formation for thickening, if
needed, as well
as provide hard water stain removal properties. It is found that organic acids
are very
efficient in promoting good hard water removal properties within the framework
of
the compositions of the present invention. Lower pH and use of one or more
suitable
acids is also found to be advantageous for disinfectancy benefits.
Examples of suitable mono-carboxylic acids include acetic acid, glycolic acid
or (3-hydroxy propionic acid and the like. Examples of suitable polycarboxylic
acids
include citric acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid,
and mixtures
thereof. Such acids are readily available in the trade. Examples of more
preferred
polycarboxylic acids, especially non-polymeric polycarboxylic acids, include
citric
acid (available from Aldrich Corporation, 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue,
Milwaukee,
Wisconsin), a mixture of succinic, glutaric and adipic acids available from
DuPont
(Wilmington, Delaware) sold as "refined AGS di-basic acids", maleic acid (also
available from Aldrich), and mixtures thereof. Citric acid is most preferred,
particularly for applications requiring cleaning of soap scum. Glycolic acid
and the
mixture of adipic, glutaric and succinic acids provide greater benefits for
hard water
removal. The amount of organic acid in the compositions herein can be from
about
0.01 % to about 1%, more preferably from about 0.01 % to about 0.5%, most
preferably
from about 0.025% to about 0.25% by weight of the composition.
1
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-26-
E. Optional Odor Control Agents
As used herein, the term "cyclodextrin" includes any of the known
cyclodextrins such as unsubstituted cyclodextrins containing from six to
twelve
glucose units, especially, alpha-cyclodextrin, beta-cyclodextrin, gamma-
cyclodextrin
and/or their derivatives and/or mixtures thereof. The alpha-cyclodextrin
consists of
six glucose units, the beta-cyclodextrin consists of seven glucose units, and
the
gamma-cyclodextrin consists of eight glucose units arranged in donut-shaped
rings.
The specific coupling and conformation of the glucose units give the
cyclodextrins
rigid, conical molecular structures with hollow interiors of specific volumes.
The
"lining" of each internal cavity is formed by hydrogen atoms and glycosidic
bridging
oxygen atoms; therefore, this surface is fairly hydrophobic. The unique shape
and
physical-chemical properties of the cavity enable the cyclodextrin molecules
to absorb
(form inclusion complexes with) organic molecules or parts of organic
molecules
which can fit into the cavity. Many odorous molecules can fit into the cavity
including many malodorous molecules and perfume molecules. Therefore,
cyclodextrins, and especially mixtures of cyclodextrins with different size
cavities,
can be used to control odors caused by a broad spectrum of organic odoriferous
materials, which may, or may not, contain reactive functional groups. The
complexation between cyclodextrin and odorous molecules occurs rapidly in the
presence of water. However, the extent of the complex formation also depends
on the
polarity of the absorbed molecules. In an aqueous solution, strongly
hydrophilic
molecules (those which are highly water-soluble) are only partially absorbed,
if at all.
Therefore, cyclodextrin does not complex effectively with some very low
molecular
weight organic amines and acids when they are present at low levels on wet
surfaces.
As the water is being removed however, e.g., the surface is being dried off,
some low
molecular weight organic amines and acids have more affinity and will complex
with
the cyclodextrins more readily.
The cavities within the cyclodextrin in the solution of the present invention
should remain essentially unfilled (the cyclodextrin remains uncomplexed)
while in
solution, in order to allow the cyclodextrin to absorb various odor molecules
when the
solution is applied to a surface. Non-derivatised (normal) beta-cyclodextrin
can be
present at a level up to its solubility limit of about 1.85% (about 1.85g in
100 grams of
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-27-
water) at room temperature. Beta-cyclodextrin is not preferred in compositions
which
call for a level of cyclodextrin higher than its water solubility limit. Non-
derivatised
beta-cyclodextrin is generally not preferred when the composition contains
surfactant
since it affects the surface activity of most of the preferred surfactants
that are
compatible with the derivatised cyclodextrins.
Preferably, the cyclodextrins used in the present invention are highly water-
soluble such as, alpha-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof, gamma-
cyclodextrin
and/or derivatives thereof, derivatised beta-cyclodextrins, and/or mixtures
thereof.
The derivatives of cyclodextrin consist mainly of molecules wherein some of
the OH
groups are converted to OR groups. Cyclodextrin derivatives include, e.g.,
those with
short chain alkyl groups such as methylated cyclodextrins, and ethylated
cyclodextrins, wherein R is a methyl or an ethyl group; those with
hydroxyalkyl
substituted groups, such as hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins and/or hydroxyethyl
cyclodextrins, wherein R is a -CH2-CH(OH)-CH3 or a -CH2CH2-OH group;
branched cyclodextrins such as maltose-bonded cyclodextrins; cationic
cyclodextrins
such as those containing 2-hydroxy-3-(dimethylamino)propyl ether, wherein R is
CH2-CH(OH)-CH2-N(CH3)2 which is cationic at low pH; quaternary ammonium,
e.g., 2-hydroxy-3-(trimethylammonio)propyl ether chloride groups, wherein R is
CH2-
CH(OH)-CH2-N+(CH3)3C1-; anionic cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl
cyclodextrins, cyclodextrin sulfates, and cyclodextrin succinylates;
amphoteric
cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl/quaternary ammonium cyclodextrins;
cyclodextrins wherein at least one glucopyranose unit has a 3-6-anhydro-
cyclomalto
structure, e.g., the mono-3-6-anhydrocyclodextrins, as disclosed in "Optimal
Performances with Minimal Chemical Modification of Cyclodextrins", F. Diedaini-
Pilard and B. Perly, The 7th International Cyclodextrin Symposium Abstracts,
April
1994, p. 49; and mixtures thereo~ Other cyclodextrin derivatives are disclosed
in
U.S. Pat. Nos.: 3,426,011, Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 4, 1969; 3,453,257;
3,453,258; 3,453,259; and 3,453,260, all in the names of Parmerter et al., and
all
issued July 1, 1969; 3,459,731, Gramera et al., issued Aug. 5, 1969;
3,553,191,
Parmerter et al., issued Jan. 5, 1971; 3,565,887, Parmerter et al., issued
Feb. 23, 1971;
4,535,152, Szejtli et al., issued Aug. 13, 1985; 4,616,008, Hirai et al.,
issued Oct. 7,
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-28-
1986; 4,678,598, Ogino et al., issued Jul. 7, 1987; 4,638,058, Brandt et al.,
issued Jan.
20, 1987; and 4,746,734, Tsuchiyama et al., issued May 24, 1988.
Highly water-soluble cyclodextrins are those having water solubility of at
least
about 10 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature, preferably at least about
20 g in
100 ml of water, more preferably at least about 25 g in 100 ml of water at
room
temperature. The availability of solubilized, uncomplexed cyclodextrins is
essential
for effective and efficient odor control performance. Solubilized, water-
soluble
cyclodextrin can exhibit more efficient odor control performance than non-
water-
soluble cyclodextrin when deposited onto surfaces.
Examples of preferred water-soluble cyclodextrin derivatives suitable for use
herein are hydroxypropyl alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated alpha-cyclodextrin,
methylated beta-cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl beta-cyclodextrin, and
hydroxypropyl
beta-cyclodextrin. Hydroxyalkyl cyclodextrin derivatives preferably have a
degree of
substitution of from about 1 to about 14, more preferably from about 1.5 to
about 7,
wherein the total number of OR groups per cyclodextrin is defined as the
degree of
substitution. Methylated cyclodextrin derivatives typically have a degree of
substitution of from about 1 to about. 18, preferably from about 3 to about
16. A
known methylated beta-cyclodextrin is heptakis-2,6-di-O-methyl-(3-
cyclodextrin,
commonly known as DIMEB, in which each glucose unit has about 2 methyl groups
with a degree of substitution of about 14. A preferred, more commercially
available,
methylated beta-cyclodextrin is a randomly methylated beta-cyclodextrin,
commonly
known as RAMEB, having different degrees of substitution, normally of about
12.6.
RAMEB is more preferred than DIMEB, since DIMEB affects the surface activity
of
the preferred surfactants more than RAMEB. The preferred cyclodextrins are
available, e.g., from Cerestar USA, Inc. and Wacker Chemicals (USA), Inc.
It is also preferable to use a mixture of cyclodextrins. Such mixtures absorb
odors more broadly by complexing with a wider range of odoriferous molecules
having a wider range of molecular sizes. Preferably at least a portion of the
cyclodextrin is alpha-cyclodextrin and/or its derivatives, gamma-cyclodextrin
and/or
its derivatives, and/or derivatised beta-cyclodextrin, more preferably a
mixture of
alpha-cyclodextrin, or an alpha-cyclodextrin derivative, and derivatised beta-
cyclodextrin, even more preferably a mixture of derivatised alpha-cyclodextrin
and
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-29-
derivatised beta-cyclodextrin, most preferably a mixture of hydroxypropyl
alpha-
cyclodextrin and hydroxypropyl beta-cyclodextrin, and/or a mixture of
methylated
alpha-cyclodextrin and methylated beta-cyclodextrin.
It is preferable that the usage compositions of the present invention contain
low levels of cyclodextrin so that no visible residue appears at normal usage
levels.
Preferably, the solution used to treat the surface under usage conditions is
virtually not
discernible when dry. Typical levels of cyclodextrin in usage compositions for
usage
conditions are from about 0.01% to about 1%, preferably from about 0.05% to
about
0.75%, more preferably from about 0.1 % to about 0.5% by weight of the
composition.
Compositions with higher concentrations can leave unacceptable visible
residues.
F. Optional Source of Peroxide
The compositions of the invention can contain peroxide such as hydrogen
peroxide, or a source of hydrogen peroxide, for further disinfectancy,
fungistatic and
fungicidal benefits. The components of the present composition are
substantially
compatible with the use of peroxides. Preferred peroxides include benzoyl
peroxide
and hydrogen peroxide. These can optionally be present in the compositions
herein in
levels of from about 0.05% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.1% to
about
3%, most preferably from about 0.2% to about 1.5%.
When peroxide is present, it is desirable to provide a stabilizing system.
Suitable stabilizing systems are known. A preferred stabilizing system
consists of
radical scavengers and/or metal chelants present at levels of from about 0.01%
to
about 0.5%, more preferably from about 0.01 % to about 0.25%, most preferably
from
about 0.01% to about 0.1%, by weight of the composition. Examples of radical
scavengers include anti-oxidants such as propyl gallate, butylated hydroxy
toluene
(BHT), butylated hydroxy anisole (BHA) and the like. Examples of suitable
metal
chelants include diethylene triamine penta-acetate, diethylene triamine penta-
methylene phosphonate, hydroxyethyl diphosphonate and the like.
G. Optional Thickening Polymer
Low levels of polymer can also be used to thicken the preferred aqueous
compositions of the present invention. In general, the level of thickening
polymer is
kept as low as possible so as not to hinder the product's end result
properties.
Xanthan gum is a particularly preferred thickening agent as it can also
enhance end
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-30-
result properties, particularly when used in low concentrations. The
thickening
polymer agent is present in from about 0.001 % to about 0.1 %, more preferably
from
about 0.0025% to about 0.05%, most preferably from about 0.005% to about
0.025%
by weight of the composition.
H. Aqueous Solvent System
The compositions which are aqueous, comprise at least about 80% aqueous
solvent by weight of the composition, more preferably from about 80% to over
99%
by weight of the composition. The aqueous compositions are typically in
micellar
form, and do not incorporate substantial levels of water insoluble components
that
induce significant micellar swelling.
The aqueous solvent system can also comprise low molecular weight, highly
water soluble solvents typically found in detergent compositions, e.g.,
ethanol,
isopropanol, etc. These solvents can be used to provide disinfectancy
properties to
compositions that are otherwise low in active. Additionally, they can be
particularly
useful in compositions wherein the total level of perfume is very low. In
effect, highly
volatile solvents can provide "lift", and enhance the character of the
perfume. Highly
volatile solvents, if present are typically present in from about 0.25% to
about 5%,
more preferably from about 0.5% to about 3%, most preferably from about 0.5%
to
about 2%, by weight of the composition. Examples of such solvents include
methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, iso-butanol, 2-butanol, pentanol, 2-
methyl-
1-butanol, methoxymethanol, methoxyethanol, methoxy propanol, and mixtures
thereof.
The aqueous solvent system preferably comprises water, more preferably soft
water, and most preferably deionized water. The use of deionized or distilled
water
eliminates issues with poor filming and/or streaking end results due to the
deposition
of hard water minerals. This water also allows the use of anionic species in
the
formula (such as surfactants and polymers) without potential issues with
calcium
and/or magnesium precipitation of these actives.
The compositions of the present invention can also include other solvents, and
in particular paraffins and isoparaffins, which can substantially reduce the
suds
created by the composition.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-31-
I. Optional Suds Suppressor
Suitable silicone suds suppressors for use herein include any silicone and
silica-silicone mixtures. Silicones can be generally represented by alkylated
polysiloxane materials while silica is normally used in finely divided forms
exemplified by silica aerogels and xerogels and hydrophobic silicas of various
types.
In industrial practice, the term "silicone" has become a generic term which
encompasses a variety of relatively high-molecular-weight polymers containing
siloxane units and hydrocarbyl groups of various types. Indeed, silicone
compounds
have been extensively described in the art, see for instance United States
Patents: US
4,076,648; US 4,021,365; US 4,749,740; US 4,983,316 and European Patents: EP
150,872; EP 217,501; and EP 499,364. Preferred are polydiorganosiloxanes such
as
polydimethylsiloxanes having trimethylsilyl end blocking units and having a
viscosity
at 25 C of from 5 x 10-5 m2/s to 0.1 m2/s, i.e. a value of n in the range 40
to 1500.
These are preferred because of their ready availability and their relatively
low cost.
A preferred type of silicone compounds useful in the compositions herein
comprises a mixture of an alkylated siloxane of the type hereinabove disclosed
and
solid silica. The solid silica can be a fumed silica, a precipitated silica or
a silica
made by the gel formation technique. The silica particles can be rendered
hydrophobic by treating them with diakylsilyl groups and/or trialkylsilane
groups
either bonded directly onto the silica or by means of silicone resin. A
preferred
silicone compound comprises a hydrophobic silanated, most preferably
trimethylsilanated silica having a particle size in the range from 10 mm to 20
mm and
a specific surface area above 50 m2/g. Silicone compounds employed in the
compositions according to the present invention suitably have an amount of
silica in
the range of 1 to 30% (more preferably 2.0 to 15%) by weight of the total
weight of
the silicone compounds resulting in silicone compounds having an average
viscosity
in the range of from 2 x 10-4m2/s to 1 m2/s. Preferred silicone compounds can
have a
viscosity in the range of from 5 x 10-3m2/s to 0.Im2/s. Particularly suitable
are
silicone compounds with a viscosity of 2 x 10-2m2/s or 4.5 x 10-2m2/s.
Suitable silicone compounds for use herein are commercially available from
various companies including Rhone Poulenc, Fueller and Dow Corning. Examples
of
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-32-
silicone compounds for use herein are Silicone DB 100 and Silicone Emulsion 2-
3597 both commercially available from Dow Coming.
Fatty acids, typical of those used in laundry cleaning products, may also be
used to suppress the suds of these solutions.
J. Optional Perfume
The present compositions optionally, but preferably, contain perfume to
provide a positive scent signal to a consumer during use of the present
compositions,
cleaning pads, and/or cleaning implements. The preferred compositions herein
typically comprise low levels of surfactant, in which case careful selection
of perfume
materials is typically required in order to create a perfume that is both
soluble in the
low-surfactant composition and still provides a positive scent signal. Perfume
is
normally incorporated in the present compositions at a level of from about
0.005% to
about 0.20%, preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.15%, more preferably from
about 0.01% to about 0.08%, and still more preferably from about 0.03% to
about
0.06%, by weight of the hard surface cleaning composition.
The ratio of surfactant to perfume in the present compositions is typically
from
about 20:1 to about 1:50, and preferably from about 1:1 to about 1:4.
In the present invention, the optional perfume comprises perfume materials
which are characterized by their boiling point (B.P.) and octanol/water
partition
coefficient (P). The octanol/water partition coefficient of a perfume
ingredient is the
ratio between its equilibrium concentrations in octanol and in water. The
boiling
points of the perfume ingredients herein are determined at the normal,
standard
pressure of about 760 mmHg. Since the partition coefficients of the preferred
perfume
ingredients of this invention have high values, they are more conveniently
given in the
form of their logarithm to the base 10, logP at 25 C.
Boiling points of many perfume ingredients can be found in the following
sources:
Properties of Organic Compounds Database CD-ROM Ver. 5.0
CRC Press
Boca Raton, Florida
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-33-
Flavor and Fragrance - 1995
Aldrich Chemical Co.
Milwaukee, Wisconsin
STN database/on-line
Design Institute of for Physical Property Data
American Institute of Chemical Engineers
STN database/on-line
Beilstein Handbook of Organic Chemistry
Beilstein Information Systems
Perfume and Flavor Chemicals
Steffen Arctander
Vol. I, II - 1969
When unreported, the 760 mmHg boiling points of perfume ingredients can be
estimated. The following computer programs are useful for estimating these
boiling
points:
MPBPVP Version 1.25 1994-96 Meylan
Syracuse Research Corporation (SRC)
Syracuse, New York
ZPARC
ChemLogic, Inc.
Cambridge, Massachusetts
The logP of many perfume ingredients has been reported; for example, the
Pomona92 database, available from Daylight Chemical Information Systems, Inc.
(Daylight CIS), Irvine, California, contains many, along with citations to the
original
literature. However, the logP values are most conveniently calculated by the
Pamona
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-34-
Med Chem/Daylight "CLOGP" program, Version 4.42 available from Biobyte
Corporation, Claremont, California. This program also lists experimental logP
values
when they are available in the Pomona92 database. The "calculated logP"
(ClogP) is
determined by the fragment approach of Hansch and Leo ( cf., A. Leo, in
Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C. Hansch, P. G. Sammens, J. B.
Taylor
and C. A. Ramsden, Eds., p. 295, Pergamon Press, 1990). The fragment approach
is
based on the chemical structure of each perfume ingredient, and takes into
account
the numbers and types of atoms, the atom connectivity, and chemical bonding.
The
ClogP values, which are the most reliable and widely used estimates for this
physicochemical property, are preferably used instead of the experimental logP
values
in the selection of perfume ingredients which are useful in the present
invention.
The present perfume materials are defined herein according to boiling point
and ClogP as follows: volatile, hydrophilic perfume materials; volatile,
hydrophobic
perfume materials; residual, hydrophilic perfume materials; residual,
hydrophobic
perfume materials.
i. Volatile, Hydrophilic Perfume Materials
Volatile, hydrophilic perfume materials have a boiling point of less than
about
250 C and a ClogP of less than about 3. These materials tend to be rather
soluble in
the present hard surface cleaning compositions, even those with relatively
high levels
of water and low levels of surfactant. These materials impart some solution
odor and
some odor to the room containing the surfaces being treated. Volatile,
hydrophilic
perfume materials tend to evaporate with the water contained in the present
compositions, which provides some odor to the room containing the treated
surfaces.
These materials also do not tend to leave visual filming and/or streaking on
the treated
surfaces. As a result, volatile, hydrophilic perfume materials typically
comprise a
relatively large portion of the present perfumes, typically at levels of from
about
0.05% to about 90%, preferably from about 1% to about 70%, more preferably
from
about 5% to about 60%, and still more preferably from about 10% to about 50%
by
weight of the perfume.
Examples of volatile, hydrophilic perfume materials include those listed in
Table 1 as follows:
_ .. I'll -
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-35-
Table 1
Examples of Volatile, Hydrophilic Perfume Materials
ClogP Boiling Pt. Boiling Pt.
Perfume Material (Pred.) (Meas.) (Pred.)
Allyl caproate 2.87 186
Amyl acetate (n-Pentyl acetate) 2.30 147
Amyl Propionate 2.83 169
p-Anisaldehyde 1.78 249
Anisole 2.06 154
Benzaldehyde (Benzenecarboxaldehyde) 1.50 179
Benzyl acetate 1.96 211
Benzylacetone 1.74 234
Benzyl alcohol 1.10 205
Benzyl formate 1.50 203
Benzyl isovalerate 3.42 256
Benzyl propionate 2.49 221
beta-gamma-Hexenol (2-Hexen-l-ol) 1.40 164
(+)-Camphor 2.18 207
(+)-Carvone 2.01 231
L-Carvone 2.01 230
Cinnamic alcohol 1.41 258
Cinnamyl formate 1.91 252
cis-Jasmone 2.64 253
cis-3-Hexenyl acetate 2.34 175
Citral (Neral) 2.95 208
Cumic alcohol 2.53 249
Cuminaldehyde 2.92 235
Cyclal (2,4-Dimethyl-3-
cyclohexene- 1 -carboxaldehyde) 2.36 203
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-36-
Dimethyl benzyl carbinol 1.89 215
Dimethyl benzyl carbinyl acetate 2.84 248
Ethyl acetate 0.71 77
Ethyl acetoacetate 0.33 181
Ethyl amyl ketone 2.44 167
Ethyl benzoate 2.64 215
Ethyl butanoate 1.77 121
3-Nonanone (Ethyl hexyl ketone) 2.97 187
Ethyl phenylacetate 2.35 228
Eucalyptol 2.76 176
Eugenol 2.40 253
Fenchyl alcohol 2.58 199
Flor Acetate (Tricyclodecenyl acetate) 2.36 233
Frutene (Tricyclodecenyl propionate) 2.89 250
gamma-Nonalactone 2.77 243
trans-Geraniol 2.77 230
cis-3-Hexen-l-ol / Leaf Alcohol 1.40 156
Hexyl acetate 2.83 171
Hexyl formate 2.38 155
Hydratopic alcohol 1.58 233
Hydroxycitronellal 1.54 241
Indole (2,3-Benzopyrrole) 2.13 254
Isoamyl alcohol 1.22 131
Isopropyl phenylacetate 2.66 237
Isopulegol 2.75 231
Isoquinoline (Benzopyridine) 1.82 243
Ligustral (2,4-Dimethyl-3-
Cyclohexene- 1 -carboxaldehyde) 2.36 204
Linalool 2.55 193
Linalool oxide 1.45 223
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-37-
Linalyl formate 3.05 212
Menthone 2.83 214
4-Methylacetophenone 2.08 226
Methyl pentyl ketone 1.91 151
Methyl anthranilate 2.02 256
Methyl benzoate 2.11 199
Methyl Phenyl Carbinyl Acetate
(alpha-Methylbenzyl acetate) 2.27 216
Methyl Eugenol (Eugenyl methyl ether) 2.67 254
Methyl Heptenone
(6-Methyl-5-hepten-2-one) 1.82 173
Methyl Heptine Carbonate 218
(Methyl 2-octynoate) 2.57
Methyl Heptyl ketone 2.97 195
Methyl Hexyl ketone 2.44 173
Methyl salicylate 2.45 223
Dimethyl anthranilate 2.16 255
Nerol 2.77 225
delta-Nonalactone 2.80 226
gamma-Octalactone 2.24 256
2-Octanol 2.72 180
Octyl Aldehyde (Caprylic aldehyde) 2.95 167
p-Cresol 1.97 202
p-Cresyl methyl ether 2.56 175
Acetanisole 1.80 258
2-Phenoxyethanol 1.19 245
Phenylacetaldehyde 1.78 195
2-Phenylethyl acetate 2.13 235
Phenethyl alcohol 1.18 218
Phenyl Ethyl dimethyl Carbinol
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-38-
(Benzyl-tert-butanol) 2.42 257
Prenyl acetate 1.68 150
Propyl butanoate 2.30 143
(+)-Pulegone 2.50 224
Rose oxide 2.90 197
Safrole 2.57 235
4-Terpinenol 2.75 211
Terpinolene (alpha-Terpineol) 2.63 219
Veratrole (1,2-Dimethoxybenzene) 1.60 206
Viridine (Phenylacetaldehyde
dimethyl acetal) 1.29 220
ii. Volatile, Hydrophobic Perfume Materials
Volatile, hydrophobic perfume materials have a boiling point of less than
about 250 C and a ClogP of greater than about 3. These materials tend to be
rather
insoluble in the present hard surface cleaning compositions, but are typically
capable
of providing a powerful positive scent signal, as they tend to be highly
volatile and
easily diffuse out of the hard surface cleaning composition. These perfume
materials
are highly desirable in the present composition since they tend to provide a
strong
scent signal, both in solution and in the room containing the surfaces being
treated.
Volatile, hydrophobic perfume materials are generally at relatively high
levels in the
present compositions of at least about 0.2%, preferably at least about 8%,
more
preferably at least about 14%, and still more preferably at least about 50% by
weight
of the perfume.
Examples of volatile, hydrophilic perfume materials include those listed in
Table 2 as follows:
Table 2
Examples of Volatile, Hydrophobic Perfume Materials
ClogP Boiling Pt. Boiling Pt.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-39-
Perfume Material (Pred.) (Meas.) (Pred.)
Allo-ocimene 4.36 195
Allyl cyclohexanepropionate 3.94 252
Allyl heptanoate 3.40 209
trans-Anethole 3.31 232
Benzyl butyrate 3.02 240
Camphene 4.18 160
Cadinene 7.27 252
Carvacrol 3.40 238
cis-3-Hexenyl tiglate 3.80 225
Citronellol 3.25 223
Citronellyl acetate 4.20 234
Citronellyl nitrile 3.09 226
Citronellyl propionate 4.73 257
Cyclohexylethyl acetate 3.36 222
Decyl Aldehyde (Capraldehyde) 4.01 208
Dihydromyrcenol 3.03 192
Dihydromyrcenyl acetate 3.98 221
3,7-Dimethyl-1-octanol 3.74 205
Diphenyloxide 4.24 259
Fenchyl Acetate
(1,3,3-Trimethyl-2-norbornanyl acetate) 3.53 234
Geranyl acetate 3.72 233
Geranyl formate 3.27 231
Geranyl nitrile 3.25 228
cis-3-Hexenyl isobutyrate 3.27 204
Hexyl Neopentanoate 4.06 213
Hexyl tiglate 4.28 221
alpha-Ionone 3.71 237
Isobornyl acetate 3.53 238
. . . .. ... . . .:1 . .. :
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-40-
Isobutyl benzoate 3.57 242
Isononyl acetate 4.28 220
Isononyl alcohol
(3,5,5-Trimethyl-l-hexanol) 3.08 194
Isopulegyl acetate 3.70 243
Lauraldehyde 5.07 250
d-Limonene 4.35 177
Linalyl acetate 3.50 230
(-)-L-Menthyl acetate 4.18 227
Methyl Chavicol (Estragole) 3.13 216
Methyl n-nonyl acetaldehyde 4.85 247
Methyl octyl acetaldehyde 4.32 224
beta-Myrcene 4.33 165
Neryl acetate 3.72 236
Nonyl acetate 4.41 229
Nonaldehyde 3.48 191
p-Cymene 4.07 173
alpha-Pinene 4.18 156
beta-Pinene 4.18 166
alpha-Terpinene 4.41 175
gamma-Terpinene 4.35 183
alpha-Terpinyl acetate 3.58 220
Tetrahydrolinalool 3.52 202
Tetrahydromyrcenol 3.52 195
2-Undecenal 4.22 235
Verdox (o-t-Butylcyclohexyl acetate) 4.06 239
--T-
Vertenex (4-tert.Butylcyclohexyl acetate) 4.06 237
iii. Residual, Hydrophilic Perfume Materials
Residual, hydrophilic perfume materials have a boiling point of greater than
about 250 C and a ClogP of less than about 3. These perfume materials tend to
be
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-41 -
rather soluble in compositions containing relatively high levels of water and
low
levels of surfactant. These materials do not provide a significant scent
signal from
solution. In addition, these materials tend to leave visual filming and/or
streaking of
the treated surfaces, especially when used in no-rinse cleaning methods, which
can be
unacceptable to consumers. As a result, these residual, hydrophilic perfume
materials
are typically incorporated in the present compositions at relatively low
levels.
Residual, hydrophilic perfume materials are typically incorporated in the
present
compositions at a level of less than about 10%, preferably less than about 3%,
more
preferably less than about 0.7%, and still more preferably less than about
0.01% by
weight of the perfume.
Examples of residual, hydrophilic perfume materials include those listed in
Table 3 as follows:
Table 3
Examples of Residual, Hydrophilic Perfume Materials
ClogP Boiling Pt. Boiling Pt.
Perfume Material (Pred.) (Meas.) (Pred.)
Coumarin 1.41 302
Ethyl methylphenylglycidate 2.71 274
Ethyl Vanillin 1.80 2.85
Isoeugenol 2.58 266
Methyl cinnamate 2.47 262
Methyl dihydrojasmonate 2.42 314
Methyl beta-naphthyl ketone 2.76 302
Phenoxy ethyl isobutyrate 2.92 277
Vanillin 1.28 285
iv. Residual, Hydrophobic Perfume Materials
Residual, hydrophobic perfume materials have a boiling point of greater than
about 250 C and a ClogP of greater than about 3. These materials tend to be
rather
, ,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-42-
insoluble in compositions having relatively high levels of water. The level of
residual,
hydrophobic perfume materials should be kept to a small amount, as such
materials
typically result in leaving visual filming andlor streaking on treated
surfaces that is
unacceptable to consumers, especially in a no-rinse cleaning method. These
perfume
materials also do not provide much in the way of a positive scent signal from
the
solution. Residual, hydrophobic perfume materials do provide a minimal scent
signal
while treating the surfaces with the present compositions, but this benefit is
negated
by the visual filming and/or streaking left behind by these materials.
Residual, hydrophobic perfume materials are typically incorporated in the
present perfume at a level of less than about 10%, preferably less than about
5%, more
preferably less than about 1%, and still more preferably less than about 0.01%
by
weight of the perfume.
Examples of residual, hydrophobic perfume materials include those listed in
Table 4 as follows:
Table 4
Examples of Residual, Hydrophobic Perfume Materials
C1ogP Boiling Pt. Boiling Pt.
Perfume Material (Pred.) (Meas.) (Pred.)
(Ambrettolide)
Oxacycloheptadec-l0-en-2-one 6.36 352
(Amyl benzoate) n-Pentyl benzoate 4.23 263
Isoamyl cinnamate 4.45 300
alpha-Amylcinnamaldehyde 4.32 289
alpha-Amylcinnamaldehyde
dimethyl acetal 4.03 320
(iso-Amyl Salicylate) isopentyl salicylate 4.43 277
(Aurantiol) Methyl
anthranilateJhydroxycitronellal Schiff base 4.22 413
Benzophenone 3.18 305
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-43-
Benzyl salicylate 4.21 320
beta-Caryophyllene 6.45 263
Cedrol 4.53 274
Cedryl acetate 5.48 289
Cinnamyl cinnamate 4.64 387
Citronellyl isobutyrate 5.04 266
Cyclohexyl salicylate 4.48 327
Cyclamen aldehyde 3.46 271
delta-Dodecalactone 4.39 279
(Dihydro Isojasmonate) Methyl 2-hexyl-3-
oxo-cyclopentanecarboxylate 3.09 314
Diphenylmethane 4.06 265
Ethylene brassylate 4.62 390
Ethyl undecylenate 4.99 261
Iso E Super 4.85 307
(Exaltolide) Pentadecanolide 6.29 338
(Galaxolide) 4,6,6,7,8,8-Hexamethyl-
1,3,4,6,7,8-hexahydro-cyclopenta(G)-2-
benzopyran 6.06 335
gamma-Methyl Ionone
(alpha-Isomethylionone) 4.02 278
Geranyl isobutyrate 5.00 295
Hexadecanolide 6.85 352
cis-3-Hexenyl salicylate 4.61 323
alpha-Hexylcinnamaldehyde 4.85 334
n-Hexyl salicylate 5.09 318
alpha---Irone 4.23 279
6-Isobutylquinoline 3.99 294
Lilial (p-tert.Butyl-alpha-
methyldihydrocinnamic aldehyde, PT
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-44-
Bucinol) 3.86 282
Linalyl benzoate 5.42 325
(2-Methoxy Naphthalene) beta-Naphthyl
methyl ether 3.24 274
10-Oxahexadecanolide 4.38 355
Patchouli alcohol 4.53 317
(Phantolide) 5-Acetyl-1,1,2,3,3,6-
hexamethylindan 5.69 333
Phenethyl benzoate 4.06 335
Phenethyl phenylacetate 3.77 350
Phenyl Hexanol (3-Methyl-5-phenyl-l-
pentanol) 3.17 296
Tonalid (7-Acetyl-1,1,3,4,4,6-
hexamethyltetralin) 6.25 344
delta-Undecalactone 3.86 262
gamma-Undecalactone 3.83 286
Vertinert Acetate 5.47 332
v. Low Odor Detection Threshold Perfume Materials
The present compositions can also contain low to moderate levels of low odor
detection threshold materials, either dissolved in the aqueous phase to the
extent of
their water solubility or incorporated into an emulsion or dispersion with the
other
hydrophobic perfume ingredients. The odor detection threshold is the lowest
vapor
concentration of that material which can be olfactorily detected. The odor
detection
threshold and some odor detection threshold values are discussed in, e.g.,
"Standardized Human Olfactory Thresholds", M. Devos et al, IRL Press at Oxford
University Press, 1990, and "Compilation of Odor and Taste Threshold Values
Data",
F. A. Fazzalari, editor, ASTM Data Series DS 48A, American Society for Testing
and
Materials, 1978. The use of small amounts of perfume ingredients that have low
odor
detection threshold values can improve perfume odor character. Perfume
ingredients
that have a significantly low detection threshold, useful in the composition
of the
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-45-
present invention, are selected from the group consisting of ambrox, bacdanol,
benzyl
salicylate, butyl anthranilate, cetalox, damascenone, alpha-damascone, gamma-
dodecalactone, ebanol, herbavert, cis-3-hexenyl salicylate, alpha-ionone, beta-
ionone,
alpha-isomethylionone, lilial, methyl nonyl ketone, gamma-undecalactone,
undecylenic aldehyde, and mixtures thereof. These materials are preferably
present at
low levels, typically less than about 30%, preferably less than about 20%,
more
preferably less than about 15%, by weight of the total perfume compositions of
the
present invention. However, only low levels are required to provide an effect.
There are also hydrophilic ingredients that have a significantly low detection
threshold, and are especially useful in the composition of the present
invention.
Examples of these ingredients are allyl amyl glycolate, anethole, benzyl
acetone,
calone, cinnamic alcohol, coumarin, cyclogalbanate, Cyclal C, cymal, 4-
decenal,
dihydro isojasmonate, ethyl anthranilate, ethyl-2-methyl butyrate, ethyl
methylphenyl
glycidate, ethyl vanillin, eugenol, flor acetate, florhydral, fructone,
frutene,
heliotropin, keone, indole, iso cyclo citral, isoeugenol, lyral, methyl
heptine carbonate,
linalool, methyl anthranilate, methyl dihydrojasmonate, methyl isobutenyl
tetrahydropyran, methyl beta naphthyl ketone, beta naphthol methyl ether,
nerol, para-
anisic aldehyde, para hydroxy phenyl butanone, phenyl acetaldehyde, vanillin,
and
mixtures thereof. Use of low odor detection threshold perfume ingredients
minimizes
the level of organic material that is released into the atmosphere.
K. Optional Detergent Adjuvants
Optional components, including detergent adjuvants such as detergency
builders, buffers, preservatives and antimicrobial agents, can also be
present.
i. DetergericX Builders
Detergent builders that are efficient for hard surface cleaners and have
reduced
filming/streaking characteristics at the critical levels are another optional
ingredient.
Preferred detergent builders are the carboxylic acid detergent builders
described
hereinbefore as part of the polycarboxylic acid disclosure, including citric
and tartaric
acids. Tartaric acid improves cleaning and can minimize the problem of
filming/streaking that usually occurs when detergent builders are added to
hard
surface cleaners.
I 1 . w 1
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-46-
The detergent builder is present at levels that provide detergent building,
and,
those that are not part of the acid pH adjustment described hereinbefore, are
typically
present at a level of from about 0.01% to about 0.3%, more preferably from
about
0.005% to about 0.2%, and most preferably from about 0.05% to about 0.1 %.
ii. Buffers
The compositions herein can also contain other various adjuncts which are
known to the art for detergent compositions. Preferably they are not used at
levels
that cause unacceptable filming/streaking. Buffers are an important class of
adjuncts
in this application. This occurs mainly as a result of the low levels of
active
employed. An ideal buffer system will maintain pH over a desired narrow range,
while not leading to streaking/filming issues. Preferred buffers in the
context of the
invention are those which are highly volatile, yet can provide cleaning
benefits in use.
As such, they are advantageous in that they can be used at higher levels than
corresponding buffers that are less volatile. Such buffers tend to have low
molecular
weight, i.e., less than about 150 g/mole and generally contain no more than
one
hydroxy group. Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanol amine,
ethanol amine, 2-amino-2-methyl-l-propanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-
propanol,
acetic acid, glycolic acid and the like. Most preferred among these are
ammonia, , 2-
dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol and acetic acid. When used, these buffers
are
present in from about 0.005% to about 0.5%, with the higher levels being more
preferred for the more volatile chemicals.
Non-volatile buffers can also be used in this invention. Such buffers must be
used at generally lower levels than the preferred levels because of increased
streaking/filming tendencies. Examples of such buffers include, but are not
limited to,
sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate and bicarbonate, 1,3-bis(aminomethyl)
cyclohexane, sodium citrate, citric acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, and the
like. Maleic
acid is particularly preferred as a buffer because of its tendency not to
induce surface
damage. Citric acid is also desirable since it provides anti-microbial
benefits as a
registered EPA active. Additionally, in compositions comprising the
hydrophilic
polymers of the present invention for daily shower applications, acidity has
been
found to promote better wetting and provide longer lasting "sheeting" effects.
When
. . . . , õ ,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-47-
used, non-volatile buffers are present in from about 0.001% to about 0.05% by
weight
of the composition.
In some instances, it could be advantageous to combine a volatile buffer with
a
non-volatile buffer to maintain the best pH control. As an example, the
volatile buffer
could be used to give an appropriate intial pH, while the non-volatile buffer
could be
used to deliver residual alkalinity. As such, the total level of non-volatiles
in the
formula is kept to a minimum.
iii. Preservatives and Antibacterial Agents
Preservatives can also be used, and may be required in many of the
compositions of the present invention, since these contain high levels of
water.
Examples of preservatives include bronopol, hexitidine sold by Angus chemical
(211
Sanders Road, Northbrook, Illinois, USA). Other preservatives include Kathon,
2-
((hydroxymethyl) (amino)ethanol, propylene glycol, sodium hydroxymethyl amino
acetate, formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-
s-
triazinetrione, and quaternary ammonium salts including dioctyl dimethyl
ammonium
chloride, didecyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, C12, C14 and C16 dimethyl
benzyl.
Preferred preservatives include 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one and
polyhexamethylene
biguanide sold by Avicia Chemicals (Wilmington, Delaware 19897) and
chlorhexidine diacetate sold by Aldrich-Sigma (1001 West Saint Paul Avenue,
Milwaukee, WI 53233), sodium pyrithione sold by Arch Chemicals (501 Merritt
Seven, P.O. Box 5204, Norwalk CT 06856) sold by Arch Chemicals. When used,
preservatives are preferentially present at concentrations of from about
0.0001% to
about 0.01%. These same preservatives can function to provide antibacterial
control
on the surfaces, but typically will require use at higher levels from about
0.005 to
about 0.1 %. Other antibacterial agents, including quaternary ammonium salts,
can be
present, but are not preferred in the context of the present invention at high
levels, i.e.,
at levels greater than about 0.05%. Such compounds have been found to often
interfere with the benefits of the preferred polymers. In particular,
quatemary
ammonium surfactants tend to hydrophobically modify hard surfaces. Thus, the
preferred polymers are found to be ineffective in compositions comprising
significant
concentrations of quaternary ammonium surfactants. Similar results have been
found
using amphoteric surfactants, including lauryl. betaines and coco amido
betaines.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-48-
When present, the level of cationic or amphoteric surfactant should be at
levels below
about 0.1%, preferably below about 0.05%. More hydrophobic
antibacterial/germicidal agents, like orthobenzyl-para-chlorophenol, are
avoided. If
present, such materials should be kept at levels below about 0.05%.
Non-limiting examples of other optional detergent adjuvants are: enzymes
such as proteases; hydrotropes such as sodium toluene sulfonate, sodium cumene
sulfonate and potassium xylene sulfonate; thickeners other than the
hydrophilic
polymers at a level of from about 0.01% to about 0.5%, preferably from about
0.01%
to about 0.1%; corrosion inhibitors such as sodium metasilicate; and aesthetic-
1o enhancing ingredients such as colorants, providing they do not adversely
impact on
filming/streaking. Other suitable corrosion inhibitors are described in
published
application W000/63333 on October 26, 2000 by Godfroid et al.
L. Other Embodiments of CleaningComposition
In order to achieve visually acceptable cleaning results on traditional
household surfaces such as ceramic tile, linoleum, vinyl flooring, wood, and
laminates
(such as Pergo manufactured by Formica), especially in the no-rinse surface
cleaning
methods described herein, the preferred hard surface cleaning compositions
herein
contain relatively low levels of slowly volatile materials and/or non-volatile
materials,
not including the optional perfume materials described herein. Compositions
with
relatively high levels of slowly volatile materials tend leave visually
unacceptable
filming and/or streaking on the treated surface, especially in no-rinse
surface cleaning
methods. As used herein, the phrase "slowly volatile material" refers to a
material that
has a boiling point of greater than about 160 C and is not a perfume material
as
described hereinbefore. Preferably, the present compositions comprise no
greater than
a total of about 0.5%, more preferably no greater than a total of about
0.425%, and
still more preferably no greater than a total of about 0.35%, by weight of the
composition, of slowly volatile plus non-volatile materials. Examples of non-
volatile
or slowly volatile materials, the amount of which is preferably limited in the
present
compositions, include, but are not limited to, non-volatile surfatants (such
as alkyl
ethoxylates), amine buffers with boiling points in excess of 160 C (such as 2-
amino-
1-butanol), organic solvents with boiling points in excess of 160 C (such as
butoxypropanol), or mixtures thereof.
"
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-49-
Other suitable hard surface cleaning compositions include those which are
described in detail in copending U.S. Patent No. 6,380,151 issued April 30,
2002 by
R. Masters et al.; published application W099/18182 April 15, 1999 N.
Policicchio et
al.; U.S. Patent No. 6,677,287 issued January 13, 2004 K. Wiliman et al.;
published
application W000/32727 on June 8, 2000 by K. Willman et al.
M. Process for MakingLHard Surface CleaningCompositions
The hard surface cleaning compositions herein can be made by mixing
together all ingredients. It has been found that for maximum perfume
solubilization in
compositions where the actives, such as surfactant, are present at low levels,
a
preferred order of addition is evident. This preferred process involves the
making of a
premix like the perfume compositions disclosed hereinbefore, that is then
added to the
"base" product. The premix comprises raw materials added in the following
order:
optional surfactant(s), if any, at about 25% activity or higher, then perfume,
then
optional polymer, then optional suds suppressor. In certain cases, it is
advantageous
to add optional solvent(s) and/or optional buffer, to the premix after the
optional suds
suppressor. Thorough mixing of the premix provides the best results. The
premix is
then added to the base, which contains water and the other components. The
combined mixture (i.e., premix in the base) is then mixed to obtain a
homogeneous
solution.
ff an organic solvent, such as ethanol, is being used in the solution, another
preferred method is to first dissolve the perfume in the organic solvent then
add this
perfume/solvent premix directly to an aqueous solution already containing the
surfactant and buffer.
Another preferred method to incorporate maximum perfume into the present
compositions with limited surfactant, is to create a premix in which perfume
is added
to a cyclodextrin mixture in aqueous media. Alternatively, the perfume-
cyclodextrin
mixture can be pre-formed prior to the premix. This approach ensures maximum
perfume incorporation into the composition, and can incorporate perfume in
compositions with little or no surfactant.
In certain cases, perfume solubilization at a relatively high level cannot be
achieved, even with the preferred processing methods. However, in applications
such
as, but not limited to, counter and floor cleaners, the entire heterogeneous
composition
1 i , ,I ....i ro I CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-50-
can be added directly to the article of use. Examples wherein this method of
use is
desirable include pre-moistened wipes, dry absorbent substrates used in
conjunction
with solution.
In cases where the surfactant active level does not limit perfume solubility
in
the compositions, a single step making process can be followed. For example,
an
acceptable order of addition is to first incorporate water, any optional
detergent
surfactant and/or organic acid, followed by any optional hydrophobic cleaning
solvent.
Once the solvent is added, pH is adjusted to optimum as desired by the
formulator.
The optional polymer can then be added followed by any optional peroxide,
perfume
and/or dye.
III. Cleaning Pad and/or Sheets
In one aspect, the present invention relates to a cleaning pad, preferably
disposable, for cleaning a hard surface, the cleaning pad comprising:
(a) at least one absorbent layer;
(b) optionally, a liquid pervious scrubbing layer; wherein the liquid
pervious scrubbing layer is preferably an apertured formed film,
more preferably a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional
plastic web, having tapered or funnel-shaped apertures and/or
surface aberrations and preferably comprising a hydrophobic
material;
(c) optionally, an attachment layer, wherein the -attachment layer
preferably comprises a clear or translucent material, more
preferably a clear or translucent polyethylene film, and wherein the
attachment layer preferably comprises loop and/or hook material
for attachment to a support head of a handle of a cleaning
implement;
(d) optionally, multiple planar surfaces;
(e) optionally, at least one functional cuff, preferably at least one free-
floating, looped functional cuff;
(f) optionally, a density gradient throughout at least one absorbent
layer; wherein the density gradient preferably comprises a first
i= .. 11 Iw I=
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-51-
absorbent layer having a density of from about 0.01 g/cm3 to about
0.15 g/cm3, preferably from about 0.03 g/cm3 to about 0.1 g/cm3,
and more preferably from about 0.04 g/cm3 to about 0.06 g/cm3,
and a second absorbent layer having a density of from about 0.04
g/cm3 to about 0.2 g/cm3, preferably from about 0.1 g/cm3 to about
0.2 g/cm3, and more preferably from about 0.12 g/cm3 to about 0.17
g/cm3; wherein the density of the first absorbent layer is about 0.04
g/cm3, preferably about 0.07 g/cm3, and more preferably about 0.1
g/cm3, less than the density of the second absorbent layer;
(g) optionally, at least one adhesive scrubbing strip, preferably
comprising a material selected from the group consisting of nylon,
polyester, polypropylene, abrasive material, and mixtures thereof;
and
(h) optionally, perfume carrier complex, preferably selected from the
group consisting of cyclodextrin inclusion complex, matrix
perfume microcapsules, and mixtures thereof; wherein the perfume
carrier complex is preferably located in an absorbent layer.
Preferably, the cleaning pad comprises at least two absorbent layers, wherein
the
absorbent layers have multiple widths in the z-dimension. Preferably, the
cleaning pad
2o has a t1200 absorbent capacity of at least about 5 grams/gram.
In another aspect, the present invention relates to a cleaning sheet,
preferably
disposable, for cleaning hard surfaces, the cleaning sheet comprising
functional cuffs,
preferably free-floating, double-layer loop functional cuffs.
During the effort to develop the present cleaning pads and sheets, Applicants
discovered that, surprisingly, an important aspect of cleaning performance is
related to
the ability to provide a cleaning pad having apertured formed films, a liquid
impervious attachment layer, and/or density gradients, and/or functional cuffs
and a
cleaning sheet having functional cuffs. In the context of a typical cleaning
operation
(i.e., where the cleaning pad and/or sheet is moved back and forth in a
direction
substantially parallel to the pad's or sheet's y-dimension or width), each of
these
structural elements provide the cleaning pads and/or sheets improved cleaning
1 1i 1
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-52-
performance, both separately and in combination with one or more additional
elements. Apertured formed films, preferably utilized in the scrubbing layer,
are
pervious to liquids and provide efficient transfer of liquid from the surface
being
cleaned to other layers of the cleaning pad, preferably one or more absorbent
layers,
while reducing the tendency for such liquid to be squeezed back onto the
surface
being cleaned. Functional cuffs are preferably free-floating so as to "flip"
back and
forth in the y-dimension during a typical cleaning operation, thus trapping
particulate
matter and reducing the tendency for such particulate matter to be redeposited
on the
surface being cleaned. Density gradients are preferably incorporated in the
absorbent
layer(s) of the cleaning pad to "pump" or "wick" liquid away from the surface
being
cleaned to areas in the cleaning pad furthest away from the surface being
cleaned. The
liquid impervious attachment layer provides a barrier which helps to better
distribute
the liquid in the x-y direction after liquid reaches the back of the pad which
is firtheset
away from cleaning surface. These aspects of the present invention, and the
benefits
provided, are discussed in detail with reference to the drawings.
The skilled artisan will recognize that various materials can be utilized to
carry
out the claimed invention. Thus, while preferred materials are described below
for the
various cleaning implement, pad, and sheet components, it is recognized that
the
scope of the invention is not limited to such descriptions.
A. Absorbent Layer
The absorbent layer serves to retain any fluid and soil absorbed by the
cleaning
pad during use. While the scrubbing layer has some affect on the pad's ability
to
absorb fluid, the absorbent layer plays the major role in achieving desired
overall
absorbency. Furthermore, the absorbent layer preferably comprises multiple
layers
which are designed to provide the cleaning pad with multiple planar surfaces
and/or
density gradients.
From a fluid absorbency perspective, the absorbent layer will be capable of
removing fluid and soil from the scrubbing layer so that the scrubbing layer
will have
capacity to continually remove soil from the surface. The absorbent layer also
should
be capable of retaining absorbed material under typical in-use pressures to
avoid
"squeeze-out" of absorbed soil, cleaning solution, etc.
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-53-
The absorbent layer will comprise any material(s) capable of absorbing and
retaining fluid during use. To achieve desired total fluid capacities, it will
be
preferred to include in the absorbent layer a material having a relatively
high capacity
(in terms of grams of fluid per gram of absorbent material). As used herein,
the term
"superabsorbent material" means any absorbent material having a g/g capacity
for
water of at least about 15 g/g, when measured under a confining pressure of
0.3 psi.
Because a majority of the cleaning fluids useful with the present invention
are
aqueous based, it is preferred that the superabsorbent materials have a
relatively high
g/g capacity for water or water-based fluids.
Representative superabsorbent materials include water insoluble, water-
swellable superabsorbent gelling polymers (referred to herein as
"superabsorbent
gelling polymers") which are well known in the literature. These materials
demonstrate very high absorbent capacities for water. The superabsorbent
gelling
polymers useful in the present invention can have a size, shape and/or
morphology
varying over a wide range. These polymers can be in the form of particles that
do not
have a large ratio of greatest dimension to smallest dimension (e.g.,
granules, flakes,
pulverulents, interparticle aggregates, interparticle crosslinked aggregates,
and the
like) or they can be in the form of fibers, sheets, films, foams, laminates,
and the like.
The use of superabsorbent gelling polymers in fibrous form provides the
benefit of
enhanced retention, relative to particles, during the cleaning process. While
their
capacity is generally lower for aqueous-based mixtures than it is for water,
these
materials still demonstrate significant absorbent capacity for such mixtures.
The
patent literature is replete with disclosures of water-swellable materials.
See, for
example, U.S. Patent 3,699,103 (Harper et al.), issued June 13, 1972; U.S.
Patent
3,770,731 (Harmon), issued June 20, 1972; U.S. Reissue Patent 32,649 (Brandt
et al.),
reissued April 19, 1989; U.S. Patent 4,834,735 (Alemany et al.), issued May
30, 1989.
Superabsorbent gelling polymers useful in the present invention include a
variety of water-insoluble, but water-swellable polymers capable of absorbing
large
quantities of fluids. Such polymeric materials are also commonly referred to
as
"hydrocolloids", and can include polysaccharides such as carboxymethyl starch,
carboxymethyl cellulose, and hydroxypropyl cellulose; nonionic types such as
polyvinyl alcohol, and polyvinyl ethers; cationic types such as polyvinyl
pyridine,
1
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-54-
polyvinyl morpholinione, and N,N-dimethylaminoethyl or N,N-diethylaminopropyl
acrylates and methacrylates, and the respective quaternary salts thereof.
Typically,
superabsorbent gelling polymers useful in the present invention have a
multiplicity of
anionic functional groups, such as sulfonic acid, and more typically carboxy,
groups.
Examples of polymers suitable for use herein include those which are prepared
from
polymerizable, unsaturated, acid-containing monomers. Thus, such monomers
include the olefinically unsaturated acids and anhydrides that contain at
least one
carbon to carbon olefinic double bond. More specifically, these monomers can
be
selected from olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acids and acid anhydrides,
olefinically unsaturated sulfonic acids, and mixtures thereof.
Some non-acid monomers can also be included, usually in minor amounts, in
preparing the superabsorbent gelling polymers useful herein. Such non-acid
monomers can include, for example, the water-soluble or water-dispersible
esters of
the acid-containing monomers, as well as monomers that contain no carboxylic
or
sulfonic acid groups at all. Optional non-acid monomers can thus include
monomers
containing the following types of functional groups: carboxylic acid or
sulfonic acid
esters, hydroxyl groups, amide-groups, amino groups, nitrile groups,
quaternary
ammonium salt groups, aryl groups (e.g., phenyl groups, such as those derived
from
styrene monomer). These non-acid monomers are well-known materials and are
described in greater detail, for example, in U.S. Patent 4,076,663 (Masuda et
al),
issued February 28, 1978, and in U.S. Patent 4,062,817 (Westerman), issued
December 13, 1977.
Olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acid and carboxylic acid anhydride
monomers include the acrylic acids typified by acrylic acid itself,
methacrylic acid,
ethacrylic acid, a-chloroacrylic acid, a-cyanoacrylic acid, (3-methylacrylic
acid
(crotonic acid), a-phenylacrylic acid, (3-acryloxypropionic acid, sorbic acid,
a-
chlorosorbic acid, angelic acid, cinnamic acid, p-chlorocinnamic acid, (3-
sterylacrylic
acid, itaconic acid, citroconic acid, mesaconic acid, glutaconic acid,
aconitic acid,
maleic acid, fumaric acid, tricarboxyethylene and maleic acid anhydride.
Olefinically unsaturated sulfonic acid monomers include aliphatic or aromatic
vinyl sulfonic acids such as vinylsulfonic acid, allyl sulfonic acid, vinyl
toluene
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-55-
sulfonic acid and styrene sulfonic acid; acrylic and methacrylic sulfonic acid
such as
sulfoethyl acrylate, sulfoethyl methacrylate, sulfopropyl acrylate,
sulfopropyl
methacrylate, 2-hydroxy-3-methacryloxypropyl sulfonic acid and 2-acrylamide-2-
methylpropane sulfonic acid.
Preferred superabsorbent gelling polymers for use in the present invention
contain carboxy groups. These polymers include hydrolyzed starch-acrylonitrile
graft
copolymers, partially neutralized hydrolyzed starch-acrylonitrile graft
copolymers,
starch-acrylic acid graft copolymers, partially neutralized starch-acrylic
acid graft
copolymers, saponified vinyl acetate-acrylic ester copolymers, hydrolyzed
acrylonitrile
or acrylamide copolymers, slightly network crosslinked polymers of any of the
foregoing copolymers, partially neutralized polyacrylic acid, and slightly
network
crosslinked polymers of partially neutralized polyacrylic acid. These polymers
can be
used either solely or in the form of a mixture of two or more different
polymers.
Examples of these polymer materials are disclosed in U.S. Patent 3,661,875,
U.S.
Patent 4,076,663, U.S. Patent 4,093,776, U.S. Patent 4,666,983, and U.S.
Patent
4,734,478.
Most preferred polymer materials for use in making the superabsorbent gelling
polymers are slightly network crosslinked polymers of partially neutralized
polyacrylic
acids and starch derivatives thereof. Most preferably, the hydrogel-forming
absorbent
polymers comprise from about 50 to about 95%, preferably about 75%,
neutralized,
slightly network crosslinked, polyacrylic acid (i.e. poly (sodium
acrylate/acrylic acid)).
Network crosslinking renders the polymer substantially water-insoluble and, in
part,
determines the absorptive capacity and extractable polymer content
characteristics of
the superabsorbent gelling polymers. Processes for network crosslinking these
polymers and typical network crosslinking agents are described in greater
detail in
U.S. Patent 4,076,663.
While the superabsorbent gelling polymers is preferably of one type (i.e.,
homogeneous), mixtures of polymers can also be used in the implements of the
present invention. For example, mixtures of starch-acrylic acid graft
copolymers and
slightly network crosslinked polymers of partially neutralized polyacrylic
acid can be
used in the present invention.
I 1'..1- II Ilrl ICA 02349726 2005-01-27
-56-
While any of the superabsorbent gelling polymers described in the prior art
can
be useful in the present invention, it has recently been recognized that where
significant levels (e.g., more than about 50% by weight of the absorbent
structure) of
superabsorbent gelling polymers are to be included in an absorbent structure,
and in
particular where one or more regions of the absorbent layer will comprise more
than
about 50%, by weight of the region, the problem of gel blocking by the swollen
particles can impede fluid flow and thereby adversely affect the ability of
the gelling
polymers to absorb to their full capacity in the desired period of time. U.S.
Patent
5,147,343 (Kellenberger et al.), issued September 15, 1992 and U.S. Patent
5,149,335
(Kellenberger et al.), issued September 22, 1992, describe superabsorbent
gelling
polymers in terms of their Absorbency Under Load (AUL), where gelling polymers
absorb fluid (0.9% saline) under a confining pressure of 0.3 psi. The methods
for
determining AUL are described in these patents. Polymers described therein can
be
particularly useful in embodiments of the present invention that contain
regions of
relatively high levels of superabsorbent gelling polymers. In particular,
where high
concentrations of superabsorbent gelling polymer are incorporated in the
cleaning pad,
those polymers will preferably have an AUL, measured according to the methods
described in U.S. Patent 5,147,343, of at least about 24 ml/g, more preferably
at least
about 27 ml/g after 1 hour; or an AUL, measured according to the methods
described
in U.S. Patent 5,149,335, of at least about 15 ml/g, more preferably at least
about 18
ml/g after 15 minutes.
U.S. Patent No. 5,599,335 (Goldman et al.), issued February 11, 1997, and
U.S. Patent No. 5,562,646 (Goldman et al.), issued October 8, 1996, also
address the
problem of gel blocking and describe superabsorbent gelling polymers useful in
overcoming this phenomena. These applications specifically describe
superabsorbent
gelling polymers which avoid gel blocking at even higher confining pressures,
specifically 0.7 psi. In the embodiments of the present invention where the
absorbent
layer will contain regions comprising high levels (e.g., more than about 50%
by
weight of the region) of superabsorbent gelling polymer, it can be preferred
that the
superabsorbent gelling polymer be as described in the aforementioned patents
to
Goldman et al.
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-57-
Other superbsorbent materials useful herein include hydrophilic polymeric
foams, such as those described in commonly assigned U.S. Patent No. 5,650,222
(DesMarais et al.), issued July 22, 1997; U.S. Patent No. 5,387,207 (Dyer et
al.),
issued February 7, 1995; U.S. Patent No. 5,563,179 (DesMarais et al.), issued
October
8, 1996; U.S. Patent No. 5,550,167 (DesMarais), issued August 27, 1996; and
U.S.
Patent No. 5,260,345 (DesMarais et al.), issued November 9, 1993. These
references
describe polymeric, hydrophilic absorbent foams that are obtained by
polymerizing a
high internal phase water-in-oil emulsion (commonly referred to as HIPEs).
These
foams are readily tailored to provide varying physical properties (pore size,
capillary
suction, density, etc.) that affect fluid handling ability. As such, these
materials are
particularly useful, either alone or in combination with other such foams or
with
fibrous structures, in providing the overall capacity required by the present
invention.
Where superabsorbent material is included in the absorbent layer, the
absorbent layer will preferably comprise at least about 15%, by weight of the
absorbent layer, more preferably at least about 20%, still more preferably at
least
about 25%, of the superabsorbent material.
The absorbent layer can also consist of, or comprise, fibrous material. Fibers
useful in the present invention include those that are naturally occurring
(modified or
unmodified), as well as synthetically made fibers. Examples of suitable
unmodified/modified naturally occurring fibers include cotton, Esparto grass,
bagasse,
kemp, flax, silk, wool, wood pulp, chemically modified wood pulp, jute, ethyl
cellulose, and cellulose acetate. Suitable synthetic fibers can be made from
polyvinyl
chloride, polyvinyl fluoride, polytetrafluoroethylene, polyvinylidene
chloride,
polyacrylics such as ORLON , polyvinyl acetate, Rayon , polyethylvinyl
acetate,
non-soluble or soluble polyvinyl alcohol, polyolefins such as polyethylene
(e.g.,
PULPEX ) and polypropylene, polyamides such as nylon, polyesters such as
DACRON or KODEL , polyurethanes, polystyrenes, and the like. The absorbent
layer can comprise solely naturally occurring fibers, solely synthetic fibers,
or any
compatible combination of naturally occurring and synthetic fibers.
The fibers useful herein can be hydrophilic, hydrophobic or can be a
combination of both hydrophilic and hydrophobic fibers. As indicated above,
the
particular selection of hydrophilic or hydrophobic fibers will depend upon the
other
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-58-
materials included in the absorbent (and to some degree the scrubbing) layer.
That is,
the nature of the fibers will be such that the cleaning pad exhibits the
necessary fluid
delay and overall fluid absorbency. Suitable hydrophilic fibers for use in the
present
invention include cellulosic fibers, modified cellulosic fibers, rayon,
polyester fibers
such as hydrophilic nylon (HYDROFIL ). Suitable hydrophilic fibers can also be
obtained by hydrophilizing hydrophobic fibers, such as surfactant-treated or
silica-
treated thermoplastic fibers derived from, for example, polyolefins such as
polyethylene or polypropylene, polyacrylics, polyamides, polystyrenes,
polyurethanes
and the like.
Suitable wood pulp fibers can be obtained from well-known chemical processes
such as the Kraft and sulfite processes. It is especially preferred to derive
these wood
pulp fibers from southern soft woods due to their premium absorbency
characteristics.
These wood pulp fibers can also be obtained from mechanical processes, such as
ground wood, refiner mechanical, therrnomechanical, chemimechanical, and chemi-
thermomechanical pulp processes. Recycled or secondary wood pulp fibers, as
well as
bleached and unbleached wood pulp fibers, can be used.
Another type of hydrophilic fiber for use in the present invention is
chemically
stiffened cellulosic fibers. As used herein, the term "chemically stiffened
cellulosic
fibers" means cellulosic fibers that have been stiffened by chemical means to
increase
the stiffness of the fibers under both dry and aqueous conditions. Such means
can
include the addition of a chemical stiffening agent that, for example, coats
and/or
impregnates the fibers. Such means can also include the stiffening of the
fibers by
altering the chemical structure, e.g., by crosslinking polymer chains.
Where fibers are used as the absorbent layer (or a constituent component
thereof), the fibers can optionally be combined with a thermoplastic material.
Upon
melting, at least a portion of this thermoplastic material migrates to the
intersections
of the fibers, typically due to interfiber capillary gradients. These
intersections
become bond sites for the thermoplastic material. When cooled, the
thermoplastic
materials at these intersections solidify to form the bond sites that hold the
matrix or
web of fibers together in each of the respective layers. This can be
beneficial in
providing additional overall integrity to the cleaning pad.
I r I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-59-
Amongst its various effects, bonding at the fiber intersections increases the
overall compressive modulus and strength of the resulting thermally bonded
member.
In the case of the chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers, the melting and
migration of
the thermoplastic material also has the effect of increasing the average pore
size of the
resultant web, while maintaining the density and basis weight of the web as
originally
formed. This can improve the fluid acquisition properties of the thermally
bonded
web upon initial exposure to fluid, due to improved fluid permeability, and
upon
subsequent exposure, due to the combined ability of the stiffened fibers to
retain their
stiffness upon wetting and the ability of the thermoplastic material to remain
bonded
at the fiber intersections upon wetting and upon wet compression. In net,
thermally
bonded webs of stiffened fibers retain their original overall volume, but with
the
volumetric regions previously occupied by the thermoplastic material becoming
open
to thus increase the average interfiber capillary pore size.
Thermoplastic materials useful in the present invention can be in any of a
variety of forms including particulates, fibers, or combinations of
particulates and
fibers. Thermoplastic fibers are a particularly preferred form because of
their ability
to form numerous interfiber bond sites. Suitable thermoplastic materials can
be made
from any thermoplastic polymer that can be melted at temperatures that will
not
extensively damage the fibers that comprise the primary web or matrix of each
layer.
Preferably, the melting point of this thermoplastic material will be less than
about
190 C, and preferably between about 75 C and about 175 C. In any event, the
melting point of this thermoplastic material should be no lower than the
temperature
at which the thermally bonded absorbent structures, when used in the cleaning
pads,
are likely to be stored. The melting point of the thermoplastic material is
typically no
lower than about 50 C.
The thermoplastic materials, and in particular the thermoplastic fibers, can
be
made from a variety of thermoplastic polymers, including polyolefins such as
polyethylene (e.g., PULPEX ) and polypropylene, polyesters, copolyesters,
polyvinyl
acetate, polyethylvinyl acetate, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride,
polyacrylics, polyamides, copolyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and
copolymers
of any of the foregoing such as vinyl chloride/vinyl acetate, and the like.
Depending
! r I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-60-
upon the desired characteristics for the resulting thermally bonded absorbent
member,
suitable thermoplastic materials include hydrophobic fibers that have been
made
hydrophilic, such as surfactant-treated or silica-treated thermoplastic fibers
derived
from, for example, polyolefins such as polyethylene or polypropylene,
polyacrylics,
polyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and the like. The surface of the
hydrophobic
thermoplastic fiber can be rendered hydrophilic by treatment with a
surfactant, such as
a nonionic or anionic surfactant, e.g., by spraying the fiber with a
surfactant, by
dipping the fiber into a surfactant or by including the surfactant as part of
the polymer
melt in producing the thermoplastic fiber. Upon melting and resolidification,
the
surfactant will tend to remain at the surfaces of the thermoplastic fiber.
Suitable
surfactants include nonionic surfactants such as Brij 76 manufactured by ICI
Americas, Inc. of Wilmington, Delaware, and various surfactants sold under the
Pegosperse trademark by Glyco Chemical, Inc. of Greenwich, Connecticut.
Besides
nonionic surfactants, anionic surfactants can also be used. These surfactants
can be
applied to the thermoplastic fibers at levels of, for example, from about 0.2
to about 1
g. per sq. of centimeter of thermoplastic fiber.
Suitable thermoplastic fibers can be made from a single polymer
(monocomponent fibers), or can be made from more than one polymer (e.g.,
bicomponent fibers). As used herein, "bicomponent fibers" refers to
thermoplastic
fibers that comprise a core fiber made from one polymer that is encased within
a
thermoplastic sheath made from a different polymer. The polymer comprising the
sheath often melts at a different, typically lower, temperature than the
polymer
comprising the core. As a result, these bicomponent fibers provide thermal
bonding
due to melting of the sheath polymer, while retaining the desirable strength
characteristics of the core polymer.
Suitable bicomponent fibers for use in the present invention can include
sheath/core fibers having the following polymer combinations: polyethylene/
polypropylene, polyethylvinyl acetate/polypropylene, polyethylene/polyester,
polypropylene/polyester, copolyester/polyester, and the like. Particularly
suitable
bicomponent thermoplastic fibers for use herein are those having a
polypropylene or
polyester core, and a lower melting copolyester, polyethylvinyl acetate or
polyethylene
I= I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-61 -
sheath (e.g., those available from Danaklon a/s and Chisso Corp.). These
bicomponent fibers can be concentric or eccentric. As used herein, the terms
"concentric" and "eccentric" refer to whether the sheath has a thickness that
is even, or
uneven, through the cross-sectional area of the bicomponent fiber. Eccentric
bicomponent fibers can be desirable in providing more compressive strength at
lower
fiber thicknesses. Preferred bicomponent fibers comprise a copolyolefin
bicomponent
fiber comprising a less than about 81% polyethylene terphthalate core and a
less than
about 51% copolyolefin sheath. Such a preferred bicomponent fiber is
commercially
available from the Hoechst Celanese Corporation, in New Jersey, under the
tradename
CELBOND T-255. As discussed below, the amount of bicomponent fibers will
preferably vary according to the density of the material in which it is used.
Methods for preparing thermally bonded fibrous materials are described in
U.S. Patent No. 5,607,414 (Richards et al.), issued March 4, 1997; and U.S.
Patent
5,549,589 (Homey et al.), issued August 27, 1996 (see especially Columns 9 to
10).
The absorbent layer can also comprise a HIPE-derived hydrophilic, polymeric
foam that does not have the high absorbency of those described above as
"superabsorbent materials". Such foams and methods for their preparation are
described in U.S. Patent 5,550,167 (DesMarais), issued August 27, 1996; and
U.S.
Patent No. 5,563,179 (Stone et al.), issued October 8, 1996.
The absorbent layer of the cleaning pad can be comprised of a homogeneous
material, such as a blend of cellulosic fibers (optionally thermally bonded)
and
swellable superabsorbent gelling polymer. Alternatively, the absorbent layer
can be
comprised of discrete layers of material, such as a layer of thermally bonded
airlaid
material and a discrete layer of a superabsorbent material. For example, a
thermally
bonded layer of cellulosic fibers can be located lower than (i.e., beneath)
the
superabsorbent material (i.e., between the superabsorbent material and the
scrubbing
layer). In order to achieve high absorptive capacity and retention of fluids
under
pressure, while at the same time providing initial delay in fluid uptake, it
can be
preferable to utilize such discrete layers when forming the absorbent layer.
In this
regard, the superabsorbent material can be located remote from the scrubbing
layer by
including a less absorbent layer as the lower-most aspect of the absorbent
layer. For
example, a layer of cellulosic fibers can be located lower (i.e., beneath)
than the
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-62-
superabsorbent material (i.e., between the superabsorbent material and the
scrubbing
layer).
In a preferred embodiment, the absorbent layer will comprise a thermally
bonded airlaid web of cellulose fibers (Flint River, available from
Weyerhaeuser,
WA) and AL Thermal C (thermoplastic available from Danaklon a/s, Varde,
Denmark), and a swellable hydrogel-forming superabsorbent polymer. The
superabsorbent polymer is preferably incorporated such that a discrete layer
is located
near the surface of the absorbent layer which is remote from the scrubbing
layer.
Preferably, a thin layer of, e.g., cellulose fibers (optionally thermally
bonded) are
positioned above the superabsorbent gelling polymer to enhance containment.
B. Optional Liquid Pervious Scrubbing Layer
The scrubbing layer is the portion of the cleaning pad that contacts the
soiled
surface during cleaning. As such, materials useful as the scrubbing layer must
be
sufficiently durable that the layer will retain its integrity during the
cleaning process.
In addition, when the cleaning pad is used in combination with a solution, the
scrubbing layer must be liquid pervious, at least in part, to be capable of
transitioning
liquids and soils to the absorbent layer. Whether the implement is used with a
cleaning solution (i.e., in the wet state) or without cleaning solution (i.e.,
in the dry
state), the scrubbing layer will, in addition to removing particulate matter,
facilitate
other functions, such as polishing, dusting, and buffing the surface being
cleaned.
The scrubbing layer can be a monolayer, or a multi-layer structure one or more
of whose layers can be slitted to facilitate the scrubbing of the soiled
surface and the
uptake of particulate matter. This scrubbing layer, as it passes over the
soiled surface,
interacts with the soil (and cleaning solution when used), loosening and
emulsifying
tough soils and permitting them to pass freely into the absorbent layer of the
pad. The
scrubbing layer preferably contains openings (e.g., slits, tapered capillaries
or
apertures) that provide an easy avenue for larger particulate matter to move
freely in
and become entrapped within the absorbent layer of the pad. Low density
structures
are preferred for use as the scrubbing layer, to further facilitate transport
of particulate
matter to the pad's absorbent layer.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-63-
In order to provide desired integrity, materials particularly suitable for the
scrubbing layer include a wide range of materials such as woven and nonwoven
materials; polymeric materials such as apertured formed thermoplastic films,
apertured plastic films, and hydroformed thermoplastic films; porous foams;
reticulated foams; reticulated thermoplastic films; and thermoplastic scrims.
Suitable
woven and nonwoven materials can comprise natural fibers (e.g., wood or cotton
fibers), synthetic fibers such as polyolefins (e.g., polyethylene and
polypropylene),
polyesters, polyamides, and synthetic cellulosics (e.g., RAYONO), or from a
combination of natural and synthetic fibers. Such synthetic fibers can be
manufactured using known processes such as carded, spunbond, meltblown,
airlaid,
needle punched and the like. In a preferred aspect of the present invention,
the
cleaning pad comprises a liquid pervious scrubbing layer which comprises, at
least in
part, an apertured formed film. Apertured formed films are preferred for the
liquid
pervious scrubbing layer because they are pervious to aqueous cleaning liquids
containing soils, including dissolved and undissolved particulate matter, yet
are non-
absorbent and have a reduced tendency to allow liquids to pass back through
and
rewet the surface being cleaned. Thus, the surface of the formed film which is
in
contact with the surface being cleaned remains dry, thereby reducing filming
and
streaking of the surface being cleaned and permitting the surface to be wiped
substantially dry. Applicants have surprisingly found that an apertured formed
film
having tapered or funnel-shaped apertures, meaning that the diameter at the
lower end
of the aperture is greater than the diameter at the upper end of the
aperature, actually
exhibits a suctioning effect as the cleaning pad is moved across the surface
being
cleaned. This aids in moving liquid from the surface being cleaned to other
layers of
the cleaning pad, such as the absorbent layer(s). In addition, tapered or
funnel-shaped
apertures have an even greater tendency to prevent liquids from passing back
through
the scrubbing layer to the surface being cleaned once they have been
transferred to
other layers, such as the absorbent layer(s). Apertured formed films having
tapered or
funnel-shaped apertures are thus preferred. Suitable apertured formed films
are
described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,929,135, entitled "Absorptive Structures Having
Tapered
Capillaries", issued to Thompson on December 30, 1975; and U.S. Pat. No.
4,324,246
entitled "Disposable Absorbent Article Having A Stain Resistant Topsheet",
issued to
, i. . i.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-64-
Mullane et al. on Apr. 13, 1982; U.S. Pat. No. 4,342,314 entitled "Resilient
Plastic
Web Exhibiting Fiber-Like Properties", issued to Radel et al. on Aug. 3, 1982;
U.S.
Pat. No. 4,463,045 entitled "Macroscopically Expanded Three-Dimensional
Plastic
Web Exhibiting Non-Glossy Visible Surface and Cloth-Like Tactile Impression",
issued to Ahr et al. on Jul. 31, 1984; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,006,394 entitled
"Multilayer
Polymeric Film" issued to Baird on Apr. 9, 1991. The preferred liquid pervious
scrubbing layer for the present invention is the apertured formed film
described in one
or more of the above patents and marketed on sanitary napkins by The Procter &
Gamble Company of Cincinnati, Ohio as DRI-WEAVE .
Although a hydrophillic apertured formed film can be used as a liquid pervious
scrubbing layer of a cleaning pad, in the context of hard surface cleaning, a
hydrophobic apertured formed film is preferred since it will have a reduced
tendency
to allow liquids to pass back through the scrubbing layer and onto the surface
being
cleaned. This results in improved cleaning performance in terms of filming and
streaking, lower soil residue, and faster drying time of the surface being
cleaned, all of
which are very important aspects of hard surface cleaning. The liquid pervious
scrubbing layer of the present cleaning pad is thus preferably a hydrophobic
apertured
formed film, at least in part. It is also recognized that the scrubbing layer
can be
comprised of more than one type of material.
In a preferred embodiment, the liquid pervious scrubbing layer is a
macroscopically expanded three-dimensional plastic web, preferably having
protuberances, or surface aberrations, on the lower surface of the scrubbing
layer
which contact the hard surface being cleaned. Surface aberrations are created
on such
a web by photoetching techniques well known in the art. A detailed description
of
such a web and a process for making it is disclosed by Ahr et al., U.S. Patent
No.
4,463,045, issued July 31, 1984 and assigned to The Procter & Gamble Company.
Ahr
et al. disclose a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional web having
surface
aberrations for use as a topsheet in diapers, sanitary napkins, incontinence
devices,
and the like. Ahr et al. prefer a web having surface aberrations because it
imparts a
non-glossy appearance to the web and improves the tactile impression of the
web by
making it feel more cloth-like to the wearer of the diaper, sanitary napkin,
etc.
However, in the context of hard surface cleaning, appearance and tactile
impression of
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-65-
a cleaning pad are of lesser importance. Applicants have found that a liquid
pervious
scrubbing layer comprising a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional web
having surface aberrations results in improved performance of the scrubbing
layer.
The surface aberrations provide a more abrasive surface which correlates to
better
cleaning performance. The surface aberrations, in combination with tapered or
funnel-
shaped apertures, provide enhanced cleaning, absorbency, and rewet
characteristics of
the cleaning pad. The liquid pervious scrubbing layer thus preferably
comprises an
apertured formed film comprising a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional
plastic web having tapered or funnel-shaped apertures and/or surface
aberrations. A
three-dimensional scrubbing layer is especially preferable for improving a
cleaning
pad's ability to pick-up particulate matter.
Figure 4a depicts a cleaning pad 400 comprising a liquid pervious scrubbing
layer 415 which comprises an apertured formed film having apertures 421 that
are
preferably tapered or funnel-shaped. The apertured formed film can comprise
the
entire scrubbing layer, or can be used in combination with other materials
according to
the present invention.
The scrubbing layer can also comprise, at least on a portion of the pad's
lower
surface, a material that provides significant texture to the pad. For example,
a
preferred means for providing such texture is to form a multilayer composite
comprising a scrim material (e.g., polypropylene) and a spunlaced material
(e.g.,
polyester). The composite is heat pressed to partially melt the scrim
material, which
results in bonding of the discrete layers. Exposure to heat also causes the
scrim
material to shrink, thereby providing a multilayer composite having wrinkles
or
puckers.
As discussed in detail below, the cleaning pad can comprise a distinct layer
that serves as an attachment layer to the cleaning implement. However, in
certain
embodiments, the cleaning pad can be designed such that the scrubbing layer
also
functions to attach the pad to the implement. For example, the scrubbing layer
can be
larger than the absorbent layer in length, width or both, such that it can be
directly
attached to the implement. This cari eliminate the need for a separate
attachment
layer.
. i
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-66-
C. Optional Attachment LMer
The cleaning pads and/or sheets of the present invention will optionally, but
preferably, have an attachment layer that allows the pad and/or sheet to be
connected
to the implement's handle or the support head in preferred implements. The
attachment layer can be necessary in those embodiments where the absorbent
layer is
not suitable for attaching the pad to the support head of the handle. The
attachment
layer can also function as a means to prevent fluid flow through the top
surface (i.e.,
the handle-contacting surface) of the cleaning pad, and can further provide
enhanced
integrity of the pad. As with the scrubbing and absorbent layers, the
attachment layer
can consist of a mono-layer or a multi-layer structure, so long as it meets
the above
requirements.
In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the attachment layer will
comprise a surface which is capable of being mechanically attached to the
handle's
support head by use of known hook and loop technology. In such an embodiment,
the
attachment layer will comprise at least one surface which is mechanically
attachable
to hooks that are permanently affixed to the bottom surface of the handle's
support
head.
Preferably, the attachment layer comprises a clear or translucent material,
especially in cleaning pads comprising a scrubbing layer and density gradient,
wherein
the scrubbing layer comprises an apertured formed film. A cleaning pad
comprising an
apertured formed film scrubbing layer and a density gradient effectively
transports soil
away from the surface being cleaned to areas in the cleaning pad further away
from
the surface being cleaned. As a result, the lower layers of the cleaning pad
actually
appear relatively clean and thus consumers might be unaware that a cleaning
pad
requires changing or disposal, or consumers might assume that the cleaning pad
is not
working properly. The attachment layer preferably comprises a clear or
translucent
film, such as polyethylene, 'polypropylene, polyester, and similar films, more
preferably a polyethylene film, to allow the visualization of soil being
absorbed in the
absorbent layer(s), especially in the upper-most absorbent layer. A consumer,
by
observing the amount of soil present in the absorbent layer, will be signaled
to dispose
of the cleaning pad or, in terms of a cleaning implement, remove and dispose
of the
currently soiled cleaning pad from the handle and apply a new cleaning pad to
the
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-67-
handle. A clear or translucent polyethylene film is also preferred because it
is typically
impervious to liquid so as to reduce the possibility that liquid will bleed
through the
attachment layer and to improve the lateral (x-y plane) distribution of the
liquid
throughout the upper-most absorbent layer, as well as helping to keep the
implement
head clean and dry.
Since a clear or translucent polyethylene film is typically not compatible
with
traditional hook and loop technology, loop and/or hook material will
preferably be
attached to the clear or translucent polyethylene film. The loop and/or hook
material
can be applied to the clear or translucent polyethylene film in a variety of
ways, such
as in narrow strips or other types of patterns. The loop and/or hook material
should be
applied to the polyethylene sheet in a manner as to permit the observation of
soil in
the absorbent layer through the clear polyethylene sheet. Alternatively, or in
addition
to the loop or hook material, the attachment layer can comprise an adhesive
tape,
preferably two-sided (e.g., 1524 Transfer Adhesive Two-Sided Tape available
from
3M Corp.), or a high tack adhesive (e.g., HL1620BZP available from Fuller Co.)
that
has sufficient wet strength in order to secure the cleaning pad to a handle.
The
attachment layer can also comprise hook or loop material laminated onto a
clear or
translucent backing material (e.g., XML-1657 available from 3M Corp.).
Another way to achieve the desired fluid imperviousness and attachability, a
laminated structure comprising, e.g., a meltblown film and fibrous, nonwoven
structure can be utilized. In another embodiment of the present invention, the
attachment layer is a tri-layered material having a layer of meltblown
polypropylene
film located between two layers of spun-bonded polypropylene.
In an alternative embodiment, the attachment layer can have a y-dimension
(width) that is greater than the y-dimension of the other cleaning pad
elements such
that the attachment layer can then engage attachment structures located on a
mop head
of a handle of a cleaning implement, such as that described hereinafter in
Section
V.A., and shown in Figure 8A. This way the cleaning pad can be secured to a
mop
head for cleaning hard surfaces.
D. Optional Multiple Planar Surfaces
While the ability of the cleaning pad to absorb and retain fluids has been
determined to be important to hard surface cleaning performance (see, e.g.,
U.S.
I I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-68-
Patent No. 5,960,508 issued October 5, 1999 (Holt et al.), U.S. Patent No.
6,003,191
issued December 21, 1999 (Sherry et al.), and U.S. Patent No. 6,048,123 issued
April
11, 2000 (Holt et al.), the overall structure of the cleaning pad is important
to cleaning
performance, as discussed in U.S. Patent No. 6,101,661 issued August 15, 2000
(N.J.
Policicchio et al.). In particular, pads having an essentially flat floor
contacting
surface (i.e., essentially one planar surface for contacting the soiled
surface during
cleaning), cleaning performance is not maximized because removed soil tends to
accumulate around the periphery of the pad, particularly at the pad's front
and rear
edges. Thus, there is significant pad surface area that does not come in
intimate
contact with the floor during cleaning. An important aspect of cleaning
performance is
related to the ability to provide a cleaning pad having multiple cleaning
surfaces or
edges, each of which contact the soiled surface during the cleaning operation.
In the
context of a cleaning implement such as a mop, these surfaces or edges are
provided
such that during the typical cleaning operation (i.e., where the implement is
moved
back and forth in a direction substantially parallel to the pad's y-dimension
or width),
each of the surfaces or edges contact the surface being cleaned as a result of
"rocking"
of the cleaning pad. The effect of multiple edges is achieved by constructing
the pad
such that it has multiple widths through its z-dimension. That is, these
multiple
widths form a plurality of surfaces or edges along the front and back of the
pad. This
preferred aspect of the invention, and the benefits provided, are discussed in
detail
with reference to the drawings.
The present pads, which provide multiple surfaces or edges during cleaning
address this issue, and provide enhanced performance. Referring to Figure 1 in
the
drawings, cleaning pad 100 is depicted as having an upper surface 103 that
allows the
pad to be releasably attached to a handle. Cleaning pad 100 also has a lower
surface
depicted generally as 110 which contacts the floor or other hard surface
during
cleaning. In this embodiment, lower surface 110 actually consists of 3
substantially
planar surfaces 112, 114 and 116. These distinct surfaces are created by
decreasing
the width of cleaning pad 100 in the pad's z-dimension. As depicted, the
planes
corresponding to surfaces 112 and 116 intersect the plane corresponding to
surface
114. Thus, when an implement to which pad 100 is attached is moved from rest
in the
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-69-
direction indicated by Yf, friction causes pad 100 to "rock" such that lower
surface
112 contacts the surface being cleaned. As the movement in the Yf direction
diminishes, lower surface 114 will then contact the surface being cleaned. As
the
implement and pad are moved from rest in the direction indicated by Yb,
friction
causes pad 100 to rock such that lower surface 116 then contacts the surface
being
cleaned. As this cleaning motion is repeated, the portion of the pad
contacting the
soiled surface is constantly changing. Thus, relative to an essentially flat
cleaning
pad, more surface area of the pad contacts the floor or other hard surface
during use.
While the pad depicted in Figure 1 is shown to have a continuous decrease in
width moving from the top to the bottom of the pad, it can be preferred to
provide
layer widths that change discontinuously. For example, as is depicted in
Figure 4b,
the absorbent layer is comprised of three distinct layers, which become
smaller in
width moving in the direction of the scrubbing layer. (That is, the layers of
the
absorbent layer become narrower, discontinuously, when moving down in the
direction of the scrubbing layer.) Furthermore, the discontinuity of these
decreasing
widths provide multiple edges in the form of the front and rear aspects of
layers 405,
407 and 409. This multiplicity of edges is believed to provide still better
particulate
pick up. Of course, the effect of multiple discrete edges can be accomplished
using
more or fewer discrete layers in the absorbent layer. The effect can
alternatively be
accomplished by, e.g., using a moldable material as the absorbent layer (i.e.,
only one
absorbent layer would be a monolayer), by using an implement whose topography
is
transferred to the pad, etc.
It will be recognized that while the discussion above relates primarily to
cleaning pads having two or three layers that decrease in width to provide the
desired
decrease in overall pad width in the z-dimension, it can be preferred to use
more than
three discrete layers, particularly when the individual layers are relatively
thin. Of
course, as discussed above, in certain embodiments there will be only one
discrete
layer, such as where a material is molded to provide the desired decreasing
width.
It will be also be recognized that while the above discussion relates to the
absorbent layer or the implement as providing the requisite decrease in width
in the z-
dimension, the desired effect can be accomplished by using an absorbent layer
of
. . , . I , . . . I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-70-
unifonm width, but using a scrubbing layer or other material having a narrower
width
than the absorbent layer.
E. Optional Functional Cuffs
An important feature of the preferred cleaning pads and/or sheets of the
present invention is the inclusion of one or more "free-floating" functional
cuffs.
Applicants have surprisingly discovered that functional cuff(s) improve the
cleaning
performance of traditional cleaning pads and sheets, as well as the cleaning
pads and
sheets of the present invention. Functional cuffs provide improved particulate
pick-up
for traditional cleaning pads and sheets, as well as the cleaning pads and
sheets of the
present invention. As a cleaning pad and/or sheet comprising functional
cuff(s) is
wiped back and forth across a hard surface, the functional cuff(s) "flip" from
side to
side, thus picking-up and trapping particulate matter. Cleaning pads and
sheets having
functional cuff(s) exhibit improved pick-up and entrapment of particulate
matter,
which are typically found on a hard surfaces, and have a reduced tendency to
redeposit
such particulate matter on the surface being cleaned.
Functional cuffs can comprise a variety of materials, including, but not
limited
to, carded polypropylene, rayon or polyester, hydroentangled polyester, spun-
bonded
polypropylene, polyester, polyethlene, or cotton, polypropylene, or blends
thereof
Where free-floating functional cuffs are utilized, the material used for the
functional
cuffs should be sufficiently rigid to allow the cuffs to "flip" from side to
side, without
collapsing or rolling-over on itself. Rigidity of the functional cuffs can be
improved
by using high basis weight materials (e.g., materials having a basis weight of
greater
than about 30 g/m2) or by adding other materials to enhance rigidity such as
scrim,
adhesives, elastomers, elastics, foams, sponges, scrubbing layers, and the
like, or by
laminating materials together. Preferably, the functional cuffs comprise a
hydroentangled substrate including, but not limited to, polyester, cotton,
polypropylene, and mixtures thereof, having a basis weight of at least about
20 g/m2
and a scrim material for stiffening.
The functional cuffs can be in the form of a mono-layer or a multiple-layer
laminate structure, and in the form of a loop or a non-loop structure.
Preferably, the
functional cuffs comprise a loop, as shown in Figures 2, 4a, and 4b of the
drawings. A
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-71-
looped functional cuff can be constructed by folding a strip of cuff material
in half to
form a loop and attaching it to the substrate. Non-loop functional cuffs can
also be
used, particularly if the material used has sufficient rigidity. The cleaning
pads and
sheets of the present invention can also comprise a combination of loop and/or
non-
loop, mono-layer and/or multiple-layer functional cuffs. In addition, the
functional
cuffs can comprise an absorbent layer, as described below.
Functional cuffs can be formed as an integral part of the lower layer of the
present cleaning pad or the substrate of the present cleaning sheet, or
separately
adhered to the cleaning pad and/or sheet. If the functional cuffs are an
integral part of
the lower layer of the cleaning pad and/or sheet, the functional cuffs are
preferably a
looped functional cuff formed by crimping the cleaning pad lower layer or
cleaning
sheet substrate, for example, in a Z-fold and/or C-fold. Alternatively, the
functional
cuffs can be separately adhered to the lower layer of a cleaning pad and/or
cleaning
sheet via a variety of methods known in the art including, but not limited to,
double-
sided adhesive tape, heat bonding, gluing, ultrasonic welding, stitching, high-
pressure
mechanical welding, and the like.
Functional cuff(s) can be incorporated in traditional cleaning pads and sheets
that are well-known in the art which comprise a variety of cellulosic and
nonwoven
material, such as sponges, foam, paper towels, polishing cloths, dusting
cloths, cotton
towels, and the like, both in a dry and pre-moistened form. In a preferred
embodiment,
functional cuffs are particularly effective when incorporated in the cleaning
pads of
the present invention, as well as those described in U.S. Patent No. 5,960,508
issued
October 5, 1999 (Holt et al.); U.S. Patent No. 6,003,191 issued December 21,
1999
(Sherry et al.); U.S. Patent No. 6,048,123 issued April 11, 2000 (Holt et al.)
and U.S.
Patent No. 6,101,661 issued August 15, 2000 (Policicchio et al.).
In another preferred embodiment, a cleaning sheet comprises one or more
functional cuffs and a substrate, preferably a nonwoven substrate comprising a
hydroentangled material, including, but not limited to, the substrates
described in U.S.
Patent No. 6,645,604 issued November 11, 2003; Fereshtehkhou et al., U.S. U.S.
Patent No. 6,561,354 issued May 13, 2003; and U.S. Patent No. 5,525,397,
issued
June 11, 1996 to Shizuno et al. In this preferred embodiment, the substrate of
the
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-72-
cleaning sheet has at least two regions, where the regions are distinguished
by basis
weight. The substrate can have one or more high basis weight regions having a
basis
weight of from about 30 to about 120 g/m2, preferably from about 40 to about
100
g/m2, more preferably from about 50 to about 90 g/m2, and still more
preferably from
about 60 to about 80 g/m2, and one or more low basis weight regions, wherein
the low
basis weight region(s) have a basis weight that is not more than about 80%,
preferably
not more than about 60%, more preferably not more than about 40%, and still
more
preferably not more than about 20%, of the basis weight of the high basis
weight
region(s). The substrate of the cleaning sheet will preferably have an
aggregate basis
weight of from about 20 to about 110 g/m2, more preferably from about 40 to
about
100 g/m2, and still more preferably from about 60 to about 90 g/m2.
One or more functional cuff(s) can be applied to, or formed as an integral
part
of, cleaning pads and sheets in a variety of locations on the pads and sheets.
For
example, the functional cuff(s) can be situated along the mid-line of the
cleaning pad
or sheet (in the x-y plane) along either the x-dimension or the y-dimension.
Preferably,
the cleaning pad or sheet comprises two functional cuffs situated at or near
opposite
edges (e.g., the leading and trailing edges of the pad and/or sheet, in terms
of the y-
dimension) of the cleaning pad or sheet. Preferably, the functional cuff(s)
are placed in
a location such that their length is perpendicular to the back and forth
mopping or
wiping direction used by the consumer.
Cleaning pads comprising functional cuff(s) are exemplified in Figures 2, 4a,
and 4b of the drawings. Figure 2 is a perspective view of a cleaning pad 200
comprising a free-floating, looped functional cuff 207. The looped functional
cuff 207
has two surfaces 209 and 211. During a typical cleaning method, such as
mopping or
wiping, the cleaning pad 200 is moved forward in the Yf direction, then
backward in
the Yb direction across the surface being cleaned. As the cleaning pad 200 is
moved in
the Yf direction, the functional cuff 207 will flip such that its surface 211
is in contact
with the surface being cleaned. Particulate matter on the surface being
cleaned is
picked-up by the surface 211 of the functional cuff 207. When the cleaning pad
200 is
then moved in the Yb direction, the functional cuff 207 will then flip over
such that its
other surface 209 is in contact with the surface being cleaned. The
particulate matter
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-73-
initially picked-up by surface 211 will be trapped between surface 211 of the
functional cuff 207 and layer 201 of the cleaning pad 200. Surface 209 of the
functional cuff 207 is then capable of picking-up additional particulate
matter.
Figures 4a and 4b illustrate a cleaning pad 400 comprising two free-floating,
looped functional cuffs 411 and 413, similar to the functional cuff 207 in
Figure 2.
Referring to Figure 4b, during a typical cleaning method, the cleaning pad 400
is
moved in the Yf direction across a hard surface and functional cuffs 411 and
413 are
flipped such that surfaces 417 and 425 are in contact with the surface being
cleaned
and are capable of picking-up particulate matter. The cleaning pad 400 is then
moved
across the hard surface in the Yb direction, causing the functional cuffs 411
and 413 to
flip over such that surfaces 419 and 423 are in contact with the surface being
cleaned.
The particulate matter picked-up by surface 425 is trapped between surface 425
and
scrubbing layer 401. Surfaces 419 and 423 are then able to pick-up additional
particulate matter from the surface being cleaned. When the cleaning pad 400
is
moved back across the hard surface in the Yf direction, the additional
particulate
matter picked-up is trapped between surface 423 and scrubbing layer 401. Where
functional cuff(s) are incorporated in cleaning pads having layers with
multiple widths
in the z-dimension, as in Figure 4b, the height (meaning the z-dimension of a
fully-
extended functional cuff) of the functional cuff is large enough so that when
the
functional cuff flips toward the mid-line of the cleaning pad, it overlaps the
layer
having the narrowest width. Figure 4a shows a cleaning pad 400 comprising two
functional cuffs 411 and 413, wherein the functional cuffs 411 and 413 are
both
flipped toward the mid-line of the cleaning pad, which is preferable for
packaging the
cleaning pad 400 for resale.
F. Optional Density Gradient
Applicants have found that incorporating a density gradient throughout the
absorbent layer(s) of the cleaning pad of the present invention has an
important effect
on cleaning performance and ability of the cleaning pad to quickly absorb
liquids,
especially liquid containing particulate matter. Although density gradients
have been
used in absorbent articles such as diapers, sanitary napkins, incontinence
devices, and
the like, Applicants have surprisingly discovered specific density gradients
uniquely
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-74-
useful for the absorbent layer in cleaning pads. Density gradients in cleaning
pads are
unique for at least two identifiable reasons. First, the absorbent layer in a
cleaning pad
needs to handle liquid with both dissolved components and undissolved,
suspended
components, such as insoluble particulate matter. In the case of diapers,
sanitary
napkins, incontinence devices, and the like, the absorbent layer typically
needs to
handle only liquids with dissolved components, such as bodily fluids. Second,
the
absorbent layer of a cleaning pad needs to absorb liquid against the force of
gravity. In
terms of diapers, sanitary napkins, incontinence devices, and the like, the
absorbent
layer typically has the force of gravity to pull liquid into, and distribute
it throughout,
the absorbent layer. Having sufficient resiliency in the cleaning pad is
important, as
described below, in maintaining good cleaning performance, especially in
cleaning
pads comprising a density gradient. The preferred cleaning pads comprising the
specific density gradients described herein exhibit improvements in at least
three
important characteristics affecting hard surface cleaning performance:
acquisition (the
time required to transfer liquid from the surface being cleaned to the
absorbent
layer(s) of the cleaning pad), distribution (the liquid wicking ability of the
absorbent
layer(s) so as to utilize as much of the pad as possible), and rewet (the
amount of dirty
liquid retained within the absorbent layer(s) and not squeezed out during a
cleaning
process).
The absorbent layer can comprise a single absorbent layer with a continuous
density gradient in the cleaning pad's z-dimension, or multiple absorbent
layers
having different densities resulting in a density gradient. A continuous
density
gradient is one in which the material comprising the cleaning pad is
homogeneous, but
has differing densities throughout the material. A process for creating a
continuous
density gradient is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,818,315, issued April 4,
1989 to
Hellgren et al. Preferably, the cleaning pad of the present invention
comprises a
density gradient resulting from multiple absorbent layers, preferably three,
each
having a different density. A density gradient is typically "strong" when the
density of
the absorbent layers increase from a lower absorbent layer to an upper
absorbent layer.
Preferably, the present cleaning pads comprise a "strong" density gradient,
which
provides fast acquisition, better core utilization by effectively wicking
liquid in the z-
and x-y directions, and a reduced tendency for allowing absorbed liquids,
especially
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-75-
those containing undissolved particulate, to be squeezed out. A strong density
gradient
preferably comprises at least two absorbent layers, with a first absorbent
layer having
a density of from about 0.01 g/cm3 to about 0.15 g/em3, preferably from about
0.03
g/cm3 to about 0.1 g/cm3, and more preferably from about 0.04 g/cm3 to about
0.06
g/cm3, and a second absorbent layer having a density of from about 0.04 g/cm3
to
about 0.2 g/em3, preferably from about 0.1 g/em3 to about 0.2 g/em3, and more
preferably from about 0.12 g/cm3 to about 0.17 g/cm3; wherein the density of
the first
absorbent layer is about 0.04 g/cm3, preferably about 0.07 g/cm3, and more
preferably
about 0.1 g/cm3, less than the density of the second absorbent layer.
In a preferred embodiment, the present cleaning pad comprises a density
gradient resulting from three absorbent layers, wherein a first absorbent
layer has a
density of from about 0.01 g/cm3 to about 0.08 g/cm3, preferably from about
0.03
g/cm3 to about 0.06 g/cm3, and a second absorbent layer has a density of from
about
0.03 g/em3 to about 0.12 g/em3, preferably from about 0.07 g/cm3 to about 0.1
g/cm3,
and a third absorbent layer has a density of from about 0.05 g/cm3 to about
0.2 g/cm3,
preferably from about 0.08 g/cm3 to about 0.15 g/cm3; wherein the difference
in
density between the first absorbent layer and the second absorbent layer, and
between
the second absorbent layer and the third absorbent layer, is at least about
0.02 g/cm3,
preferably at least about 0.04 g/cm3.
In another preferred embodiment, referring to Figure 4b of the drawings, a
cleaning pad 400 comprises a first absorbent layer 405 having a density of
about 0.05
g/cm3, a second absorbent layer 407 having a density of about 0.1 g/cm3, and a
third
absorbent layer 409 having a density of about 0.15 g/em3. It is recognized
that a such a
density gradient can be present in a cleaning pad with or without layers
having
multiple widths in the z-dimension, as shown in Figure 4b.
As a result of the density gradient, the porosity, meaning the ratio of the
volume of interstices of a material to the volume of its mass, of the
absorbent layer
will typically decrease as the density increases. The porosity is important,
particularly
in the context of a cleaning pad for cleaning hard surfaces, because the
liquid to be
absorbed by the cleaning pad typically contains moderate amounts of relatively
large
particulate matter. As the soiled liquid enters the cleaning pad through the
scrubbing
layer, the larger particulate matter becomes entrapped in the interstices of
the lower
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-76-
absorbent layers. As the porosity of the absorbent layers decreases, and the
density
increases, the larger particulate matter becomes trapped in the larger
interstices of the
lower absorbent layers and the remaining liquid is then transferred to the
upper
absorbent layers. This allows the liquid to be more easily transferred towards
the
higher-density layers and allows the particulate matter to remain trapped in
the
interstices of the lower absorbent layers. As a result, the cleaning pad
retains both
liquid and particulate matter much more effectively than cleaning pads without
a
strong density gradient.
Where an absorbent layer has a density of less than about 0.1 g/cm3, the layer
tends to be less resilient, which is another important property of the present
cleaning
pad as discussed below. In order to increase the resiliency of an absorbent
layer
having a relatively low density, a thermoplastic material, preferably a
bicomponent
fiber, is combined with the fibers of the absorbent layer. Upon melting, at
least a
portion of this thermoplastic material migrates to the intersections of the
fibers,
typically due to interfiber capillary gradients. These intersections become
bond sites
for the thermoplastic material. When cooled, the thermoplastic materials at
these
intersections solidify to form the bond sites that hold the matrix or web of
fibers
together in each of the respective layers. This can be beneficial in providing
additional overall integrity to the cleaning pad. While bicomponent fibers are
known
in the art, they are typically used at levels of less than about 15%.
Applicants have
found that in order to provide desired resiliency, an absorbent layer having a
density
of less than about 0.05 g/cm3 preferably comprises at least about 20%,
preferably at
least about 30%, more preferably at least about 40%, of a thermoplastic
material such
as a bicomponent fiber. A preferable bicomponent fiber comprises a
copolyolefin
bicomponent fiber comprising a less than about 81% polyethylene terphthalate
core
and a less than about 51 % copolyolefin sheath and is commercially available
from the
Hoechst Celanese Corporation under the tradename CELBOND T-255.
G. Optional Adhesive Scrubbing Strips
The cleaning pads of the present invention can optionally comprise adhesive
scrubbing strips to enhance the tough-soil removal ability of the present
cleaning pads.
Adhesive scrubbing strips typically used herein are composed of materials
often used
for making 'scouring pads. Such materials are typically composed of polymer
blends
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-77-
with or without specific abrasives. Typical polymers used include nylon,
polyester
and polypropylene or blends thereof. Nylon is the most preferred material
since it
provides greater stiffness and durability versus polyester and polypropylene.
To
increase mechanical scrubbing ability, abrasive materials can be combined with
the
polymers. For example, 3M Scotch Brite scouring pads are composed of nylon
fibers combined with silicon carbide and/or aluminum oxide and/or calcium
carbonate
as abrasives. Depending on the degree of scrubbing desired, the abrasive level
and
type can be adjusted accordingly. Alternatively, for more surface-safe
scrubbing, the
adhesive scrubbing strips can be composed of only polymer or polymer blends
combined with binders or curing adhesives without any abrasives.
An alternative to using materials found in typical scouring pads is to use
brushes containing bristles to achieve scrubbing. Such bristles are typically
composed
of polymer or polymer blends, with or without abrasives. In the context of
brushes,
bristles made of nylon again are preferred because of rigidity, stiffness,
and/or
durability. A preferred nylon bristle is that commercially available from 3M
Corp.
under the trade name Tynex 612 nylon. These bristles have shown less water
absorption versus commercial Nylon 66. Reducing the ability of the present
adhesive
scrubbing strips to absorb water is important since water absorption decreases
bristle
stiffness and recovery while impacting scrubbing ability.
A third approach for creating a scrubbing strip is to use netting or scrim
materials to form the scrubbing strip. Again, the netting or scrim is
typically
composed of a polymer or polymer blend, either with or without abrasives. The
netting or scrim is typically wrapped around a secondary structure to provide
some
bulk. The shape of the holes in the netting can include, but is not limited
to, a variety
of shapes such as squares, rectangles, diamonds, hexagons or mixtures thereof.
Typically, the smaller the area composed by the holes in the netting the
greater the
scrubbing ability. This is primarily due to the fact that there are more
points where
scrim material intersects. These intersection points are typically areas
contacting the
floor. An alternative to wrapping netting or scrim is to apply molten extruded
polymers directly onto the secondary structure such as a non-woven. Upon
curing the
polymer would create high points of stiffer material as compared to the
secondary
non-woven which in turn provides scrubbing ability.
i
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-78-
The dimension of the scrubbing strip can have a significant impact on the
ability structure to remove tough stains and soils. Along with dimension, the
force
applied can also significantly impact scrubbing ability. The force applied is
often
determined by location where scrubbing strip is applied on mop or on pad.
The present adhesive scrubbing strip is preferably rectangular in shape. The x-
dimension of the adhesive scrubbing strip is typically from about 10 mm to
about 300
mm, preferably from about 30 mm to about 190 mm, and more preferably from
about
50 mm to about 75 mm. The y-dimension of the adhesive scrubbing strip is
typically
from about 5 mm to about 50 mm, preferably from about 10 mm to about 40 mm,
and
more preferably from about 15 mm to about 30 mm. The z-dimension (thickness)
of
the adhesive scrubbing strip is typically from about 1 mm to about 20 mm,
preferably
from about 2 mm to about 15 mm, and more preferably from about 3 mm to about
10
mm.
The x- and y-dimensions of the adhesive scrubbing strip typically have an
impact upon tough stain removal from hard surfaces. In general, smaller x- and
y-
dimensions of the scrubbing strip result in a more effective tough stain
removal ability
of the cleaning pad and/or implement. A reduction in the dimensions of the
scrubbing
strip typically results in a proportionate reduction in the number of strokes
needed to
remove the tough stain from the hard surface being cleaned. Also, increasing
the z-
dimension (thickness) of the scrubbing strip tyically results in better tough
stain
removal. The improvement in tough stain removal by varying the dimensions of
the
scrubbing strip generally applies to scrubbing strips comprising a variety of
materials.
In addition, increasing the z-dimension (thickness) of the scrubbing strip,
allows one
to utilize softer materials, such as nylon without abrasive material, in the
scrubbing
strip while achieving a similar level of tough stain removal as compared to
scrubbing
strips comprising harder materials, such as polypropylene. Also, tough stain
removal
can be enhanced by incorporating a mixture of materials in the scrubbing
strip, such as
nylon and abrasive materials, such as silicon carbide, aluminum oxide, calcium
carbonate, and the like, or a combination of a polyester wadding wrapped in a
nylon
netting.
. .I , I . .. ~ .
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-79-
The ratio of an area of a surface of the cleaning pad to an area of a surface
of
the adhesive scrubbing strip is typically from about 840:1 to about 3:1,
preferably
from about 140:1 to about 6:1, and more preferably from about 56:1 to about
15:1.
Examples of scrubbing strips of the present inventions have dimensions that
include, but are not limited to, the following (expressed as (y-dimension) X
(x-
dimension) X (z-dimension)): 32 mm X 267 mm X 8 mm; 32 mm X 64 mm X 8 mm;
32 mmX 64mmX 5 mm; and 32mmX 64mmX l0mm.
i. Placement of Adhesive Scrubbing Strip on CleaningLPad
In one embodiment, the adhesive scrubbing strip is attached directly to a
cleaning pad of the present invention. This achieves scrubbing yet encourages
more
frequent disposal of the adhesive scrubbing strip. This can be achieved by
attaching
the scrubbing strip onto the pad during actual processing or by designing a
separate
scrubbing strip that can be attached to the pad by a consumer via a peel-and-
stick
adhesive or a velcro loop and hook design (hooks on pad). In this context, a
consumer
can choose whether to incorporate a scrubbing strip into the cleaning pad or
not. If a
consumer requires a scrubbing strip, he or she can simply attach it onto the
pad or use
a pad with a scrubbing strip already attached.
With a design where the scrubbing strip is attached directly to the pad,
having
optimum dimensions of the scrubbing strip, especially in relative to the
dimensions of
the cleaning pad, is important. The scrubbing strip has to be made reasonably
small
and thin so that fluid absorption into the cleaning pad and/or wiping is not
negatively
affected. Typically, the most preferred position for the scrubbing strip is in
the centre
of the cleaning pad since this is where the most pressure can be applied.
Figures 4a
and 4b show a cleaning pad 400 of the present invention having an adhesive
scrubbing
strip 430 attached to a liquid pervious scrubbing layer 401, wherein the
scrubbing
strip 430 is located generally in the center of the lower surface of the
cleaning pad
400. Alternatively, the scrubbing strip can be placed on the outer extremities
of the
pad, but this is typically less effective and; if function cuffs are
incorporated into the
cleaning pad, can interfere with the cuffs functioning properly in a cleaning
pad
design which utilizes functional cuffs which move back and forth. A preferred
approach for achieving scrubbing via functional cuffs is to add a netting or
scrim
material around the cuffs to increase their stiffness and rigidity.
I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-80-
ii. Effective ScrubbingLVersus Surface Safety
While achieving effective scrubbing is important for being able to more easily
remove tough spots and stains, it is important that this be done without
causing
damage to the surface being scrubbed.
An adhesive scrubbing strip that is composed of a polymer (preferably nylon)
and without abrasive material provides the best balance between tough stain
removal
and surface safety. Adhesive scrubbing strips containing higher levels of
abrasive
material are particularly prone to damaging the surfaces being cleaned.
Additionally,
a scrubbing strip composed of a brush made of nylon bristles also tends to
cause less
surface damage.
The other important data to note is a comparison of a scrubbing strip attached
to a mop head versus attached to a cleaning pad. A scrubbing strip attached to
a
cleaning pad typically shows more surface damage than a scrubbing strip
attached to
the leading edge of a mop head. Again while not wishing to be limited by
theory, it is
believed that this higher surface damage is the result of a smaller dimension
for the
scrubbing strip and the ability to apply higher pressures when the scrubbing
strip is
attached to a cleaning pad such that the mop head is in flat position. When a
scrubbing strip is on the leading edge of a mop head, the mop head needs to be
tilted
and the mop turned 90 degrees resulting in the ability to apply less pressure.
In net, the most preferred option for providing surface safe effective
scrubbing
uses a scrubbing strip composed primarily of polymer nylon being the most
preferred,
with little to no abrasives.
iii. Methods of Using a Cleaning Pad Comprising Adhesive
Scrubbing Strips
Effective tough stain removal can be made easier by combining specific
product designs with specific instructions for use.
Effective tough stain removal would be defined as means by which a tough
stain can be eliminated from the surface without creating negatives from the
standpoint of: (1) Damage to surface, (2) End Result appearance of floor, (3)
Amount
of effort required to scrub, and (4) Convenience and Ease of Use.
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-81-
To balance these 4 factors it is preferred that tough stain removal be
attacked
systemically. Rather than trying to achieve tough stain removal all through
mechanical abrasion, it is preferred that tough stain removal be achieved
through a
combination of mechanical abrasion and chemical action. To help achieve this
requires specific instructions. For example through pictures and/or words we
would
instruct consumers for best results to: First saturate tough spots and stains
with
cleaning solution and let soak for several minutes, then applying gentle but
firm
pressure scrub tough stain or spot until removed. Optionally, an additional
instruction
can be added that can state that a scrubbing strip may scratch some plastic or
painted
io surfaces and should be tested in an inconspicuous area first before using.
H. Optional Perfume Carrier Complex
The cleaning pads of the present invention can contain an effective amount of
various moisture-activated encapsulated perfume particles, as an optional
ingredient.
The encapsulated particles act as protective carriers and reduce the loss of
perfume
prior to use. Such materials include, for example, cyclodextrin/perfume
inclusion
complexes, polysaccharide cellular matrix perfume microcapsules, and the like.
Encapsulation of perfume minimizes the diffusion and loss of the volatile
blooming
perfume ingredients. Perfume is released when the materials are wetted, such
as
when wiping a damp hard surface with a cleaning pad having a perfume carrier
complex, to provide a pleasant odor signal in use. Especially preferred are
cyclo-
dextrin inclusion complexes.
The optional water-activated protective perfume carriers are very useful in
the
present cleaning pads. They allow the use of lower level of perfume in the
cleaning
pads because of the reduced loss of the perfume during manufacturing and use.
Furthermore, since the protected perfume is used in the form of a dry powder,
instead
of a liquid, the perfume carrier complex can be easily incorporated into the
present
cleaning pads. Preferably, the perfume carrier complex is incorporated into
the
absorbent layer of the present cleaning pads, so that when liquid is absorbed
into the
absorbent layer, the volatile blooming perfume materials will be release,
providing an
appealing scent signal to the consumer of the cleaning pad.
Also, after the cleaning pad is disposed, the less volatile perfume materials
will
remain to mask any malodors that can develop in the cleaning pad due to the
dirty
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-82-
detergent solution stored in the absorbent layer of the cleaning pad. If the
preferred
cyclodextrin inclusion complexes are utilized, the cyclodextrin can function
to absorb
any malodors that develop after the cleaning pad is disposed and begins to dry
out.
Due to the minimal loss of the volatile ingredients of the blooming perfume
compositions provided by the water activated protective perfume carrier, the
perfume
compositions that incorporate them can contain less blooming perfume
ingredients
than those used in the free, unencapsulated form. The encapsulated and/or
complexed perfume compositions typically contain at least about 20%,
preferably at
least about 30%, and more preferably at least about 40% blooming perfume
ingredients. Optionally, but preferably, compositions that contain
encapsulated and/or
complexed perfume also comprise free perfume in order to provide consumers
with a
positive scent signal before the cleaning pad is used.
i. Cyclodextrin
As used herein, the term "cyclodextrin" includes any of the known
cyclodextrins such as unsubstituted cyclodextrins containing from six to
twelve
glucose units, especially, alpha-, beta-, and gamma-cyclodextrins, and/or
their
derivatives, and/or mixtures thereof. The alpha-cyclodextrin consists of 6,
the beta-
cyclodextrin 7, and the gamma-cyclodextrin 8, glucose units arranged in a
donut-
shaped ring. The specific coupling and conformation of the glucose units give
the
cyclodextrins a rigid, conical molecular structure with a hollow interior of a
specific
volume. The "lining" of the internal cavity is formed by hydrogen atoms and
glycosidic bridging oxygen atoms, therefore this surface is fairly
hydrophobic. These
cavities can be filled with all or a portion of an organic molecule with
suitable size to
form an "inclusion complex." Alpha-, beta-, and gamma-cyclodextrins can be
obtained from, among others, American Maize-Products Company (Amaizo),
Hammond, Indiana.
Cyclodextrin derivatives are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos: 3,426,011, Parmerter
et
al., issued Feb. 4; 1969; 3,453,257, 3,453,258, 3,453,259, and 3,453,260, all
in the
names of Parmerter et al., and all also issued July 1, 1969; 3,459,731,
Gramera et al.,
issued Aug. 5, 1969; 3,553,191, Parmerter et al., issued Jan. 5, 1971;
3,565,887,
Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 23, 1971; 4,535,152, Szejtli et al., issued Aug.
13, 1985;
4,616,008, Hirai et al., issued Oct. 7, 1986; 4,638,058, Brandt et al., issued
Jan. 20,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-83-
1987; 4,746,734, Tsuchiyama et al., issued May 24, 1988; and 4,678,598, Ogino
et
al., issued Jul. 7, 1987. Examples of cyclodextrin derivatives suitable for
use herein
are methyl-beta-cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl-beta-cyclodextrin, and
hydroxypropyl-
beta-cyclodextrin of different degrees of substitution (D.S.), available from
Amaizo;
Wacker Chemicals (USA), Inc.; and Aldrich Chemical Company. Water-soluble
derivatives are also highly desirable.
The individual cyclodextrins can also be linked together, e.g., using
multifunctional agents to form oligomers, polymers, etc. Examples of such
materials
are available commercially from Amaizo and from Aldrich Chemical Company (beta-
cyclodextrin/epichlorohydrin copolymers).
The preferred cyclodextrin is beta-cyclodextrin. It is also desirable to use
mixtures of cyclodextrins. Preferably at least a major portion of the
cyclodextrins are
alpha-, beta- and/or gamma-cyclodextrins, more preferably alpha- and beta-
cyclodextrins. Some cyclodextrin mixtures are commercially available from,
e.g.,
Ensuiko Sugar Refining Company, Yokohama, Japan.
ii. Formation of Cyclodextrin/Perfume Inclusion Complexes
The perfume/cyclodextrin inclusion complexes of this invention are formed in
any of the ways known in the art. Typically, the complexes are formed either
by
bringing the perfume and the cyclodextrin together in a suitable solvent,
e.g., water,
or, preferably, by kneading/slurrying the ingredients together in the presence
of a
suitable, preferably minimal, amount of solvent, preferably water. The
kneading/slurrying method is particularly desirable because it produces
smaller
complex particles and requires the use of less solvent, eliminating or
reducing the
need to further reduce particle size and separate excess solvent. Disclosures
of
complex formation can be found in Atwood, J.L., J.E.D. Davies & D.D.
MacNichol,
(Ed.): Inclusion Compounds, Vol. III, Academic Press (1984), especially
Chapter 11,
Atwood, J.L. and J.E.D. Davies (Ed.): Proceedings of the Second lnternational
Symposium of Cyclodextrins Tokyo, Japan, (July, 1984), and J. Szejtli,
Cyclodextrin
Technoloay, Kluwer Academic Publishers (1988.
In general, perfume/cyclodextrin complexes have a molar ratio of perfume
compound to cyclodextrin of about 1:1. However, the molar ratio can be either
higher or lower, depending on the size of the perfume compound and the
identity of
1 I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-84-
the cyclodextrin compound. The molar ratio can be determined by forming a satu-
rated solution of the cyclodextrin and adding the perfume to form the complex.
In
general the complex will precipitate readily. If not, the complex can usually
be
precipitated by the addition of electrolyte, change of pH, cooling, etc. The
complex
can then be analyzed to determine the ratio of perfume to cyclodextrin.
As stated hereinbefore, the actual complexes are determined by the size of the
cavity in the cyclodextrin and the size of the perfume molecule. Desirable
complexes
can be formed using mixtures of cyclodextrins since perfumes are normally
mixtures
of materials that vary widely in size. It is usually desirable that at least a
majority of
the material be alpha-, beta-, and/or gamma-cyclodextrin, more preferably beta-
cyclodextrin. The content of the perfume in the beta-cyclodextrin complex is
typic-
ally from about 5% to about 15%, more normally from about 7% to about 12%.
Continuous complexation operation usually involves the use of supersaturated
solutions, kneading/slurrying method, and/or temperature manipulation, e.g.,
heating
and then either cooling, freeze-drying, etc. The complexes are dried to a dry
powder
to make the desired composition. In general, the fewest possible process steps
are
preferred to avoid loss of perfume.
iii. Matrix Perfume Microcapsules
Water-soluble cellular matrix perfume microcapsules are solid particles
containing perfume stably held in the cells. The water-soluble matrix material
comprises mainly polysaccharide and polyhydroxy compounds. The polysaccharides
are preferably higher polysaccharides of the non-sweet, colloidally-soluble
types,
such as natural gums, e.g., gum arabic, starch derivatives, dextrinized and
hydrolyzed
starches, and the like. The polyhydroxy compounds are preferably alcohols,
plant-
type sugars, lactones, monoethers, and acetals. The cellular matrix
microcapsules
useful in the present invention are prepared by, e.g., (1) forming an aqueous
phase of
the polysaccharide and polyhydroxy compound in proper proportions, with added
emulsifier if necessary or desirable; (2) emulsifying the perfumes in the
aqueous
phase; and (3) removing moisture while the mass is plastic or flowable, e.g.,
by spray
drying droplets of the emulsion. The matrix materials and process details are
disclosed in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,971,852, Brenner et al., issued July 27,
1976, .
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-85-
The present invention preferably has minimal non-encapsulated surface
perfume, preferably less than about 1%.
Moisture-activated perfume microcapsules can be obtained commercially, e.g.,
as IN-CAPO from Polak's Frutal Works, Inc., Middletown, New York; and as
Optilok System0 encapsulated perfumes from Encapsulated Technology, Inc.,
Nyack, New York.
Water-soluble matrix perfume microcapsules preferably have size of from
about 0.5 micron to about 300 microns, more preferably from about 1 micron to
about
200 microns, most preferably from about 2 microns to about 100 microns.
I. Other Embodiments of Cleaning Pad and/or Sheets
To enhance the cleaning pad's and/or sheet's ability to remove tough soil
residues and increase the amount of cleaning fluid in contact with the
cleaning
surface, it can be desirable to incorporate a scrim material into the cleaning
pad and/or
sheet. The scrim will be comprised of a durable, tough material that will
provide
texture to the pad's and/or sheet's scrubbing layer, particularly when in-use
pressures
are applied to the pad and/or sheet. Preferably, the scrim will be located
such that it is
in close proximity to the surface being cleaned. Thus, the scrim can be
incorporated
as part of the scrubbing layer or the absorbent layer; or it can be included
as a distinct
layer, preferably positioned between the scrubbing and absorbent layers. In
one
preferred embodiment, where the scrim material is of the same x-y dimension as
the
overall cleaning pad and/or sheet, it is preferred that the scrim material be
incorporated such that it does not directly contact, to a significant degree,
the surface
being cleaned. This will maintain the ability of the pad to move readily
across the
hard surface and will aid in preventing non-uniform removal of the cleaning
solution
employed. As such, if the scrim is part of the scrubbing layer, it will be an
upper layer
of this component. Of course, the scrim must at the same time be positioned
sufficiently low in the pad and/or sheet to provide its scrubbing function.
Thus, if the
scrim is incorporated as part of the absorbent layer, it will be a lower layer
thereof. In
a separate embodiment, it can be desirable to place the scrim such that it
will be in
direct contact with the surface to be cleaned.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-86-
In addition to the importance of properly positioning the scrim is that the
scrim
not significantly impede fluid flow through the pad. The scrim therefore is a
relatively
open web.
The scrim material will be any material that can be processed to provide a
tough, open-textured web. Such materials include polyolefins (e.g.,
polyethylene,
polypropylene), polyesters, polyamides, and the like. The skilled artisan will
recognize that these different materials exhibit a different degree of
hardness. Thus,
the hardness of the scrim material can be controlled, depending on the end-use
of the
pad/implement. Where the scrim is incorporated as a discrete layer, many
commercial
sources of such materials are available (e.g., design number V01230, available
from
Conwed Plastics, Minneapolis, MN). Alternatively, the scrim can be
incorporated by
printing a resin or other synthetic material (e.g. latex) onto a substrate,
such as is
disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,745,021, issued May 17, 1988 to Ping, III et
al., and
U.S. Patent No. 4,733,774, issued March 29, 1988 to Ping, III et al.
The various layers that comprise the cleaning pad and/or sheet can be bonded
together utilizing any means that provides the pad with sufficient integrity
during the
cleaning process. The scrubbing and attachment layers can be bonded to the
absorbent layer or to each other by any of a variety of bonding processes,
including the
use of a uniform continuous layer of adhesive, a patterned layer of adhesive
or any
array of separate lines, spirals or spots of adhesive. Alternatively, bonding
processes
can comprise heat bonds, pressure bonds, ultrasonic bonds, dynamic mechanical
bonds or any other suitable bonding processes or combinations of these bonding
processes as are known in the art. Bonding can be around the perimeter of the
cleaning pad (e.g., heat sealing the scrubbing layer and optional attachment
layer
and/or scrim material), and/or across the area (i.e., the x-y plane) of the
cleaning pad
so as to form a pattern on the surface of the cleaning pad. Bonding the layers
of the
cleaning pad with ultrasonic bonds across the area of the pad will provide
integrity to
avoid shearing of the discrete pad layers during use. Functional cuffs can be
attached
to the scrubbing layer and/or absorbent layer via similar bonding processes,
including
stitching processes known in the art.
"Resiliency" is an important property of the cleaning pads of the present
invention. A highly resilient cleaning pad is able to more effectively absorb
and retain
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-87-
liquid compared to less resilient cleaning pads. Also, where the cleaning pad
comprises layers having multiple widths in the z-dimension, the resiliency of
the
cleaning pad allows it to maintain its "inverse pyramid" structure, even under
pressures encountered during a typical cleaning operation, such as wet
mopping.
"Resiliency," in terms of cleaning pads as used herein, refers to the ability
of a
cleaning pad to "spring back" to its original thickness (measured in the z-
dimension)
after being subject to compression by a downward force parallel to its z-
dimension.
The resiliency of a cleaning pad is measured in terms of a percentage of its
original
thickness, as described in the Test Methods section below. Briefly, a cleaning
pad is
saturated with an aqueous nonionic buffered solution. The original thickness
of the
cleaning pad (the z-dimension) is then measured. A downward pressure
(equivalent to
about .25 psi) is then exerted on the cleaning pad, parallel to its z-
dimension. The
pressure is released, and the thickness of the cleaning pad is measured after
a period of
30 seconds. The resiliency is calculated as a percentage, representing the
ratio of its
thickness after being compressed under pressure to its original thickness
before any
pressure is applied. Preferably, the cleaning pads of the present invention
exhibit a
resiliency of at least about 95%, more preferably at least about 98%, and
still more
preferably at least about 100%, and yet still more preferably at least about
105%. A
cleaning pad is capable of exhibiting a resiliency of greater than 100%,
especially if
the cleaning pad comprises superabsorbent material as described herein.
The cleaning pads will preferably have an absorbent capacity when measured
under a confining pressure of 0.09 psi after 20 minutes (1200 seconds)
(hereafter
referred to as "t1200 absorbent capacity") of at least about 5 g deionized
water per g of
the cleaning pad. The absorbent capacity of the pad is measured at 20 minutes
(1200
seconds) after exposure to deionized water, as this represents a typical time
for the
consumer to clean a hard surface such as a floor. The confining pressure
represents
typical pressures exerted on the pad during the cleaning process. As such, the
cleaning pad should be capable of absorbing significant amounts of the
cleaning
solution within this 1200 second period under 0.09 psi. The cleaning pad will
more
preferably have a t1200 absorbent capacity of at least about 10 g/g, still
more
preferably at least about 15 g/g, still more preferably at least about 20 g/g
and most
I . I.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-88-
preferably at least about 30 g/g. The cleaning pad will preferably have a t900
absorbent capacity of at least about 5 g/g, more preferably a t900 absorbent
capacity of
at least about 15 g/g.
Values for t1200 and t900 absorbent capacity are measured by the performance
under pressure (referred to herein as "PUP") method, which is described in
detail in
the Test Methods section below.
Preferably, but not necessarily, the cleaning pads also have a total fluid
capacity (of deionized water) of at least about 100 grams, more preferably at
least
about 200 grams, still more preferably at least about 300 grams and most
preferably at
least about 400 grams. While pads having a total fluid capacity less than 100
grams
are within the scope of the invention, they are not as well suited for
cleaning large
areas, such as seen in a typical household, as are higher capacity pads.
The cleaning pad of the present invention should also be capable of retaining
absorbed fluid, even under the pressures exerted during the cleaning process.
This is
referred to herein as the cleaning pad's ability to avoid "squeeze-out" of
absorbed
fluid, or conversely its ability to retain absorbed fluid under pressure. The
method for
measuring squeeze-out is described in the Test Methods section. Briefly, the
test
measures the ability of a saturated cleaning pad to retain fluid when
subjected to a
pressure of 0.25 psi. Preferably, the cleaning pads of the present invention
will have a
squeeze-out value of not more than about 40%, more preferably not more than
about
25%, still more preferably not more than about 15%, and most preferably not
more
than about 10%.
The cleaning implement and/or pad of the present invention is preferably used
in combination with a hard surface cleaning composition as described
hereinbefore.
The present invention also encompasses methods of using the cleaning
implement, pad, and/or sheet of the present invention. The methods involve the
cleaning of a hard surface, preferably inanimate surfaces. A preferred method
of use
comprises the step of contacting or wiping a hard surface, preferably
inanimate, with a
cleaning implement, a cleaning pad, andior a cleaning sheet, all of which are
described
hereinbefore. The method preferably comprises a typical surface cleaning
process,
including, but not limited to, wiping, mopping, or scrubbing.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-89-
The present invention further encompasses articles of manufacture comprising
a cleaning implement, cleaning pad and/or cleaning sheet according to the
present
invention in association with a set of instructions. As used herein, the
phrase "in
association with" means the set of instructions are either directly printed on
the
cleaning implement, cleaning pad, and/or cleaning sheet itself or presented in
a
separate manner including, but not limited to, a brochure, print
advertisement,
electronic advertisement, and/or verbal communication, so as to communicate
the set
of instructions to a consumer of the article of manufacture. The set of
instructions
preferably comprise the instruction to clean a hard surface, preferably
inanimate, by
contacting or wiping the surface with the cleaning implement, cleaning pad
and/or
cleaning sheet. Where the cleaning pad and/or sheet is of a type designed to
be used in
conjunction with a handle to provide a cleaning implement, such as a cleaning
pad
comprising an attachment layer, the article of manufacture preferably
comprises a
cleaning pad or cleaning sheet in association with a set of instructions
comprising the
instruction to clean a hard surface, preferably inanimate, by attaching the
cleaning pad
or cleaning sheet to a handle to provide a cleaning implement and then
contacting or
wiping the hard surface with the cleaning implement.
Referring to the figures which depict the cleaning pad and/or sheet of the
present invention, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a cleaning pad 200
comprising a
free-floating, looped functional cuff 207. The looped functional cuff 207 has
two
surfaces 209 and 211. During a typical cleaning method, such as mopping or
wiping,
the cleaning pad 200 is moved forward in the Yf direction, then backward in
the Yb
direction across the surface being cleaned. As the cleaning pad 200 is moved
in the Yf
direction, the functional cuff 207 will flip such that its surface 211 is in
contact with
the surface being cleaned. Particulate matter on the surface being cleaned is
picked-up
by the surface 211 of the functional cuff 207. When the cleaning pad 200 is
then
moved in the Yb direction, the functional cuff 207 will then flip over such
that its
other surface 209 is in contact with the surface being cleaned. The
particulate matter
initially picked-up by surface 211 will be trapped between surface 211 of the
functional cuff 207 and layer 201 of the cleaning pad 200. Surface 209 of the
functional cuff 207 is capable of picking-up additional particulate matter.
The
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-80-
cleaning pad also comprises a scrubbing layer 201, an attachment layer 203 and
an
absorbent layer 205 positioned between the scrubbing layer and the attachment
layer.
Alternatively, layers 201, 203, and 205 can represent a single absorbent
layer. For
simplicity, cleaning pad 200 is not depicted as having multiple widths in the
z-
dimension. As indicated above, while Figure 2 depicts each of layers 201, 203
and
205 as a single separate layers of material, one or more of these layers can
consist of a
laminate of two or more plies. In a preferred embodiment, scrubbing layer 201
is an
apertured formed film, preferably a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional
plastic web. Also, although not depicted in Figure 2, materials that do not
inhibit
fluid flow can be positioned between scrubbing layer 201 and absorbent layer
203
and/or between absorbent layer 203 and attachment layer 205. However, it is
important that the scrubbing and absorbent layers be in substantial fluid
communication, to provide the requisite absorbency of the cleaning pad. While
Figure
2 depicts pad 200 as having all of the pad's layers of equal size in the x and
y
dimensions, it is preferred that the scrubbing layer 201 and attachment layer
205 be
larger than the absorbent layer, such that layers 201 and 205 can be bonded
together
around the periphery of the pad to provide integrity. The scrubbing and
attachment
layers can be bonded to the absorbent layer or to each other by any of a
variety of
bonding means, including the use of a uniform continuous layer of adhesive, a
patterned layer of adhesive or any array of separate lines, spirals or spots
of adhesive.
Alternatively, the bonding means can comprise heat bonds, pressure bonds,
ultrasonic
bonds, dynamic mechanical bonds or any other suitable bonding means or
combinations of these bonding means as are known in the art. Bonding can be
around
the perimeter of the cleaning pad,,and/or across the surface of the cleaning
pad so as
to form a pattern on the surface of the scrubbing layer 201.
Figure 3 is a blown perspective view of the absorbent layer 305 of an
embodiment of a cleaning pad of the present invention. The cleaning pad's
scrubbing
layer and optional attachment layer are not shown in Figure 3. Absorbent layer
305 is
depicted in this embodiment as consisting of a tri-laminate structure.
Specifically
absorbent layer 305 is shown to consist of a discrete layer of particulate
superabsorbent gelling material, shown as 307, positioned between two discrete
layers
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-91 -
306 and 308 of fibrous material. In this embodiment, because of the region 307
of
high concentration of superabsorbent gelling material, it is preferred that
the
superabsorbent material not exhibit gel blocking discussed above. In a
particularly
preferred embodiment, fibrous layers 306 and 308 will each be a thermally
bonded
fibrous substrate of cellulosic fibers, and lower fibrous layer 308 will be in
direct fluid
communication with the scrubbing layer (not shown). (Layer 307 can
alternatively be
a mixture of fibrous material and superabsorbent material, where the
superabsorbent
material is preferably present in a relatively high percentage by weight of
the layer.)
Also, while depicted as having equal widths, in a preferred embodiment layer
306 will
io be wider than layer 307 and layer 307 will be wider than layer 308. When a
scrubbing
and attachment layer are included, such a combination will provide a pad
having
multiple widths in the z-dimension.
Figure 4a is a plan view of a preferred cleaning pad 400, with the liquid
pervious scrubbing layer facing the viewer. Figure 4b is a cross-sectional
view (taken
along the y-z plane) of cleaning pad 400. Referring to Figures 4a and 4b,
cleaning pad
400 has two free-floating, looped functional cuffs 411 and 413.
Referring specifically to Figure 4b, cleaning pad 400 has a scrubbing layer
401, an attachment layer 403, an absorbent layer indicated generally as 404
positioned
between the scrubbing and attachment layers, two free-floating, looped
functional
cuffs 411 and 413, and an adhesive scrubbing strip 430. Absorbent layer 404
consists
of three discrete layers 405, 407 and 409. Layer 409 is wider than layer 407
which is
wider than layer 405. This decreasing width results in the functional cuffs
411 and 413
having improved functionality. During a typical cleaning operation, the
cleaning pad
400 is moved in the Yf direction across a hard surface and functional cuffs
411 and
413 are flipped such that surfaces 417 and 425 are in contact with the surface
being
cleaned and are capable of picking-up particulate matter. The cleaning pad 400
is then
moved across the hard surface in the Yb direction, causing the functional
cuffs 411
and 413 to flip over such that surfaces 419 and 423 are in contact with the
surface
being cleaned. The particulate matter picked-up by surface 425 is trapped
between
surface 425 and scrubbing layer 401. Surfaces 419 and 423 are then able to
pick-up
additional particulate matter from the surface being cleaned. When the
cleaning pad
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-92-
400 is moved back across the hard surface in the Yf direction, the additional
particulate matter picked-up is trapped between surface 423 and scrubbing
layer 401.
Figure 4a illustrates the general textured pattern provided by materials 417
and
419 comprising the functional cuffs 411 and 413, and adhesive scrubbing strip
430.
The functional cuffs 411 and 413 are both flipped towards the mid-line of the
cleaning
pad, which is preferable for packaging the cleaning pad 400 for resale. Also
depicted
in Figure 4a is a scrubbing layer 401, comprising an apertured formed film
containing
apertures 421 that are preferably tapered or funnel-shaped. Also depicted in
Figure 4a
is region 410 corresponding to the periphery of pad 400 where scrubbing layer
401
io and attachment layer 403 are bonded by any acceptable method. In a
preferred
embodiment, bonding is accomplished by heat sealing.
In a preferred embodiment, layers 405 and 407 of absorbent layer 404
comprise a high concentration of superabsorbent material, while layer 409
contains
little or no superabsorbent material. In such embodiments, one or both of
layers 405
and 407 can comprise a homogenous blend of superabsorbent material and fibrous
material. Alternatively, one or both layers can be comprised of discrete
layers, e.g.,
two fibrous layers surrounding an essentially continuous layer of
superabsorbent
particles.
Although not a requirement, Applicants have found that where superabsorbent
particles are incorporated in the pad, it can be desirable to reduce the level
of or
eliminate superabsorbent particles at the extreme front and rear edges of the
pad. This
accomplished in pad 400 by constructing absorbent layer 409 without
superabsorbent
material.
A preferred cleaning pad is represented in Figure 4b, which comprises two
functional cuffs, an adhesive scrubbing strip, a liquid pervious scrubbing
layer
comprising an apertured formed film, three absorbent layers, and an attachment
layer.
J. Process for Making Cleaning Pads and/or Sheets
The various layers and/or elements of the present cleaning pad are bonded
together to form a unitary structure. The various layers and/or elements can
be bonded
in a variety of ways including, but not limited to, adhesive bonding, thermal
bonding,
ultra sonic bonding, and the like. The various layers and/or elements can be
assembled
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-93-
to form a cleaning pad either by hand or by a conventional line converting
process
known in the art.
When the layers and/or elements are adhesively bonded together, the adhesive
is typically selected so that the bond formed by the adhesive is able to
maintain its
strength in wet environments, especially when the cleaning pad is saturated
with fluid
and/or soil. The selection of the adhesive is particularly important when
bonding two
absorbent layers together, bonding an absorbent layer and an attachment layer
together, or bonding an absorbent layer and a liquid pervious scrubbing layer
together.
In this context, the adhesive is typically selected such that the adhesive
provides a
bond with high water resistence, e.g. with a bond retention of at least about
30%,
preferably at least about 50%, and more preferably at least about 70% of the
dry bond
strength value. Bond strength values can be measured according to a partially
modified ASTM D 1876-95 (1995) (T-Peel Test) standard method, which is
described
in detail in U.S. Patent No. 5,969,025 issued October 19, 1999 to Corzani.
Adhesives that can be used in the present invention include vinylic emulsions,
including those based on vinyl acetate or other vinyl esters and ranging from
homopolymers to copolymers with ethylene and/or acrylic monomers (vinyl
acrylics);
acrylic emulsions which can be either homopolymers or copolymers; a cross-
linked
adhesive including those created by including a reactive co-monomer (e.g., a
monomer containing carboxyl, hydroxyl, epoxy, amide, isocyanate, or the like,
functionality) which are capable of cross-linking the polymer themselves (e.g.
carboxyl groups reacting with hydroxyl, epoxy or isocyanate groups) or by
reaction
with an external cross-linker (e.g. urea-formaldehyde resin, isocyanates,
polyols,
epoxides, amines and metal salts, especially zinc). The adhesives herein can
also
include limited quantities of tackifying resins to improve adhesion, such as
the
addition of hydrogenated rosin ester tackifier to a vinyl acetate/ethylene
copolymer
latex. Other suitable water-based adhesive compositions include those
disclosed in
U.S. Patent No. 5,969,025 issued October 19, 1999 to Corzani.
IV. Pre-Moistened Cleaning Wipe
The hard surface cleaning compositions described herein can be used in a pre-
moistened wipe, which can be used to wipe surfaces either alone or in
combination
,_ .. ... _ 1 , 1..._.l_
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-94-
with a handle to form a cleaning implement as described hereinaffter. The wipe
substrate can be composed of suitable unmodified and/or modified naturally
occurring
fibers including cotton, Esparto grass, bagasse, hemp, flax, silk, wool, wood
pulp,
chemically modified wood pulp, jute, ethyl cellulose, and/or cellulose
acetate.
Suitable synthetic fibers can comprise fibers of one, or more, of polyvinyl
chloride,
polyvinyl fluoride, polytetrafluoroethylene, polyvinylidene chloride,
polyacrylics such
as ORLON , polyvinyl acetate, Rayon , polyethylvinyl acetate, non-soluble or
soluble polyvinyl alcohol, polyolefins such as polyethylene (e.g., PULPEX )
and
polypropylene, polyamides such as nylon, polyesters such as DACRON or KODEL ,
polyurethanes, polystyrenes, and the like, including fibers comprising
polymers
containing more than one monomer. The absorbent layer can comprise solely
naturally occurring fibers, solely synthetic fibers, or any compatible
combination of
naturally occurring and synthetic fibers.
The fibers useful herein can be hydrophilic, hydrophobic or can be a
combination of both hydrophilic and hydrophobic fibers. As indicated above,
the
particular selection of hydrophilic or hydrophobic fibers depends upon the
other
materials included in the absorbent (and to some degree) the scrubbing layer
described
hereinafter.. Suitable hydrophilic fibers for use in the present invention
include
cellulosic fibers, modified cellulosic fibers, rayon, cotton, polyester fibers
such as
hydrophilic nylon (HYDROFIL ). Suitable hydrophilic fibers can also be
obtained
by hydrophilizing hydrophobic fibers, such as surfactant-treated or silica-
treated
thermoplastic fibers derived from, for example, polyolefins such as
polyethylene or
polypropylene, polyacrylics, polyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and the
like.
Suitable wood pulp fibers can be obtained from well-known chemical processes
such as the Kraft and sulfite processes. It is especially preferred to derive
these wood
pulp fibers from southern soft woods due to their premium absorbency
characteristics.
These wood pulp fibers can also be obtained from mechanical processes, such as
ground wood, refiner mechanical, thermomechanical, chemimechanical, and chemi-
thermomechanical pulp processes. Recycled or secondary wood pulp fibers, as
well as
bleached and unbleached wood pulp fibers, can be used.
1 .. CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-95-
Another type of hydrophilic fiber for use in the present invention is
chemically
stiffened cellulosic fibers. As used herein, the term "chemically stiffened
cellulosic
fibers" means cellulosic fibers that have been stiffened by chemical means to
increase
the stifffiess of the fibers under both dry and aqueous conditions. Such means
can
include the addition of a chemical stiffening agent that, for example, coats
and/or
impregnates the fibers. Such means can also include the stiffening of the
fibers by
altering the chemical structure, e.g., by crosslinking polymer chains.
Where fibers are used as the absorbent layer (or a constituent component
thereof), the fibers can optionally be combined with a thermoplastic material.
Upon
melting, at least a portion of this thermoplastic material migrates to the
intersections
of the fibers, typically due to interfiber capillary gradients. These
intersections
become bond sites for the thermoplastic material. When cooled, the
thermoplastic
materials at these intersections solidify to form the bond sites that hold the
matrix or
web of fibers together in each of the respective layers. This can be
beneficial in
providing additional overall integrity to the cleaning wipe.
Amongst its various effects, bonding at the fiber intersections increases the
overall compressive modulus and strength of the resulting thermally bonded
member.
In the case of the chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers, the melting and
migration of
the thermoplastic material also has the effect of increasing the average pore
size of the
resultant web, while maintaining the density and basis weight of the web as
originally
formed. This can improve the fluid acquisition properties of the thermally
bonded
web upon initial exposure to fluid, due to improved fluid permeability, and
upon
subsequent exposure, due to the combined ability of the stiffened fibers to
retain their
stiffness upon wetting and the ability of the thermoplastic material to remain
bonded
at the fiber intersections upon wetting and upon wet compression. In net,
thermally
bonded webs of stiffened fibers retain their original overall volume, but with
the
volumetric regions previously occupied by the thermoplastic material becoming
open
to thus increase the average interfiber capillary pore size.
Thermoplastic materials useful in the present invention can be in any of a
variety of forms including particulates, fibers, or combinations of
particulates and
fibers. Thermoplastic fibers are a particularly preferred form because of
their ability
to form numerous interfiber bond sites. Suitable thermoplastic materials can
be made
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-96-
from any thermoplastic polymer that can be melted at temperatures that will
not
extensively damage the fibers that comprise the primary web or matrix of each
layer.
Preferably, the melting point of this thermoplastic material will be less than
about
190 C, and preferably between about 75 C and about 175 C. In any event, the
melting point of this thermoplastic material should be no lower than the
temperature
at which the thermally bonded absorbent structures, when used in the cleaning
pads,
are likely to be stored. The melting point of the thermoplastic material is
typically no
lower than about 50 C.
The thermoplastic materials, and in particular the thermoplastic fibers, can
be
made from a variety of thermoplastic polymers, including polyolefins such as
polyethylene (e.g., PULPEX ) and polypropylene, polyesters, copolyesters,
polyvinyl
acetate, polyethylvinyl acetate, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride,
polyacrylics, polyamides, copolyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and
copolymers
of any of the foregoing such as vinyl chloride/vinyl acetate, and the like.
Depending
upon the desired characteristics for the resulting thermally bonded absorbent
member,
suitable thermoplastic materials include hydrophobic fibers that have been
made
hydrophilic, such as surfactant-treated or silica-treated thermoplastic fibers
derived
from, for example, polyolefins such as polyethylene or polypropylene,
polyacrylics,
polyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and the like. The surface of the
hydrophobic
thermoplastic fiber can be rendered hydrophilic by treatment with a
surfactant, such as
a nonionic or anionic surfactant, e.g., by spraying the fiber with a
surfactant, by
dipping the fiber into a surfactant or by including the surfactant as part of
the polymer
melt in producing the thermoplastic fiber. Upon melting and resolidification,
the
surfactant will tend to remain at the surfaces of the thermoplastic fiber.
Suitable
surfactants include nonionic surfactants such as Brij 76 manufactured by ICI
Americas, Inc. of Wilmington, Delaware, and various surfactants sold under the
Pegosperse trademark by Glyco Chemical, Inc. of Greenwich, Connecticut.
Besides
nonionic surfactants, anionic surfactants can also be used. These surfactants
can be
applied to the thermoplastic fibers at levels of, for example, from about 0.2
to about 1
3o g. per square centimeter of thermoplastic fiber.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-97-
Suitable thermoplastic fibers can be made from a single polymer
(monocomponent fibers), or can be made from more than one polymer (e.g.,
bicomponent fibers). As used herein, "bicomponent fibers" refers to
thermoplastic
fibers that comprise a core fiber made from one polymer that is encased within
a
thermoplastic sheath made from a different polymer. The polymer comprising the
sheath often melts at a different, typically lower, temperature than the
polymer
comprising the core. As a result, these bicomponent fibers provide thermal
bonding
due to melting of the sheath polymer, while retaining the desirable strength
characteristics of the core polymer.
Suitable bicomponent fibers for use in the present invention can include
sheath/core fibers having the following polymer combinations: polyethylene/
polypropylene, polyethylvinyl acetate/polypropylene, polyethylene/polyester,
polypropylene/polyester, copolyester/polyester, and the like. Particularly
suitable
bicomponent thermoplastic fibers for use herein are those having a
polypropylene or
polyester core, and a lower melting copolyester, polyethylvinyl acetate or
polyethylene
sheath (e.g., those available from Danaklon a/s, Chisso Corp., and CELBOND ,
available from Hercules). These bicomponent fibers can be concentric or
eccentric.
As used herein, the terms "concentric" and "eccentric" refer to whether the
sheath has
a thickness that is even, or uneven, through the cross-sectional area of the
2o bicomponent fiber. Eccentric bicomponent fibers can be desirable in
providing more
compressive strength at lower fiber thicknesses.
Methods for preparing thermally bonded fibrous materials are described in
U.S. Patent No. 5,607,414 issued March 4, 1997 (Richards et al.), and U.S.
Patent
No. 5,549,589 (Homey et al.), issued August 27, 1996.
The absorbent layer can also comprise a HIPE-derived hydrophilic, polymeric
foam. Such foams and methods for their preparation are described in U.S.
Patent
5,550,167 (DesMarais), issued August 27, 1996; and U.S. Patent No. 5,563,179
(Stone) issued October 8, 1996.
The wipe can consist of one or more layers optionally including a scrub layer
for maximum cleaning efficiency. For pre-moistened wipes that use a single
substrate, the substrate preferably consists of fibers comprising of some
combination
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-98-
of hydrophilic and hydrophobic fibers, and more preferably a composition
consisting
of at least about 30% hydrophobic fibers and even more preferably at least
about 50%
of hydrophobic fibers in a hydroentangled web. By hydrophobic fibers, it is
meant
polyester as well as those derived from polyolefins such as polyethylene,
polypropylene and the like. The combination of a hydrophobic and absorbent
hydrophilic fibers represents a particularly preferred embodiment for the
single sheet
pre-moistened wipe since the absorbent component, typically cellulose, aids in
the
sequestering and removal of dust and other soils present on the surface. The
hydrophobic fibers are particularly useful in cleaning greasy soils, in
improving the
pre-moistened wipe and in lowering the friction between substrate and hard
surface
(glide). In terms of rank ordering of fiber chemical composition for improved
glide,
the inventors have found polyester, particularly polyester, along with
polypropylene to
be most effective in providing excellent glide, followed by polyethylene.
Cellulose (or
rayon) based pre-moistened wipes, though highly absorbent lead to significant
friction
between substrate and surface to be cleaned. Fiber blends are more difficult
to rank
order from a glide perspective, though the inventors have found that even low
levels
of polyester or polypropylene content can significantly improve the glide
performance
in virtually all cases. Fiber compositions that typically have a coefficient
of friction
with glass can be improved, as needed, by impregnating or chemically bonding
the
wipe with low levels of silicone or other chemicals that are known to reduce
friction.
Silicones are preferred since they also reduce composition sudsing, leading to
improved result.
Various forming methods can be used to form a suitable fibrous web. For
instance, the web can be made by nonwoven dry forming techniques, such as
air-laying, or alternatively by wet laying, such as on a paper making machine.
Other
non-woven manufacturing techniques, including but not limited to techniques
such as
melt blown, spunbonded, needle punched, and hydroentanglement methods can also
be used.
In one embodiment, the dry fibrous web can be an airlaid nonwoven web
comprising a combination of natural fibers, staple length synthetic fibers and
a latex
binder. The dry fibrous web can be about 20-80 percent by weight wood pulp
fibers,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-99-
10-60 percent by weight staple length polyester fibers, and about 10-25
percent by
weight binder.
The dry, fibrous web can have a basis weight of between about 30 and about 100
grams per square meter. The density of the dry web can be measured after
evaporating
the liquid from the premoistened wipe, and the density can be less than about
0.15
grams per cubic centimeter. The density is the basis weight of the dry web
divided by
the thickness of the dry web, measured in consistent units, and the thickness
of the dry
web is measured using a circular load foot having an area of about 2 square
inches and
which provides a confining pressure of about 95 grams per square inch. In one
embodiment, the dry web can have a basis weight of about 64 grams per square
meter,
a thickness of about 0. 06 cm, and a density of about 0. 11 grams per cubic
centimeter.
In one embodiment, the dry fibrous web can comprise at least 50 percent by
weight wood pulp fibers, and more preferably at least about 70 percent by
weight
wood pulp fibers. One particular airlaid nonwoven web which is suitable for
use in the
present invention comprises about 73.5 percent by weight cellulosic fibers
(Southern
softwood Kraft having an average fiber length of about 2.6 mm); about 10.5
percent
by weight polyester fibers having a denier of about 1.35 gram/9000 meter of
fiber
length and a staple length of about 0.85 inch; and about 16 percent by weight
of a
binder composition comprising a styrene butadiene copolymer. The binder
composition can be made using a latex adhesive commercially available as
Rovene
5550 (49 percent solids styrene butadiene) available from Mallard Creek
Polymers of
Charlotte, N.C.
One suitable airlaid non-woven web for use in the present invention is the
airlaid
nonwoven web employed in PAMPERS BABY FRESH brand baby wipes marketed
by The Procter & Gamble Co. of Cincinnati, Ohio.
The following patents are incorporated herein by reference for their
disclosure
related to webs: U.S. Patent 3,862,472 issued Jan 28, 1975; U.S. Patent
3,982,302
issued Sept. 28, 1976; U.S. Patent 4,004,323 issued Jan. 25, 1977; U.S. Patent
4,057,669 issued Nov. 8, 1977; U.S. Patent 4,097,965 issued July 4, 1978; U.S.
Patent
4,176,427 issued Dec. 4, 1979; U.S. Patent 4,130,915 issued Dec. 26, 1978;
U.S.
Patent 4,135,024 issued Jan. 16, 1979; U.S. Patent 4,189,896 issued Feb. 26,
1980;
U.S. Patent 4,207,367 issued June 10, 1980; U.S. Patent 4,296,161 issued Oct.
20,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 100 -
1981; U.S. Patent 4,309,469 issued Jan 25, 1982; U.S. Patent 4,682,942 issued
July
28, 1987 and U.S. Patents 4,637,859; 5,223,096; 5,240,562; 5,556,509; and
5,580,423.
The art recognizes the use of dusting sheets such as those in U.S. Patent
3,629,047, U.S. Patent 3,494,421, U.S. Patent 4,144,370, U.S. Patent
4,808,467, U.S.
Patent 5,144,729, and U.S. Patent 5,525,397, as effective for picking up and
retaining
particulate dirt. These sheets require a structure that provides reinforcement
yet free
fibers in order to be effective. The applicants herein have found that similar
structures
used dry for dusting can also be advantageously used when pre-moistened with
liquid
at levels from about 0.5 gram of chemical solution per gram dry substrate or
greater.
These levels are significantly higher than the levels used for chemical
additives such
as mineral oils, waxes etc. often applied to conventional dusting sheets to
enhance
performance. In particular, the wipes of this invention are specifically
intended to be
used pre-moistened with aqueous compositions.
In one preferred embodiment, the cleaning sheet has at least two regions where
the regions are distinguished by basis weight. The measure for basis weight is
described in US Patent No. 6,561,354 issued May 13, 2003 and published
application
no. W098/52459 on November 26, 1998. Briefly, the measurement is achieved
photographically, by differentiating dark (low basis weight) and light (high
basis)
network regions. In particular, the cleaning sheet comprises one or more low
basis
weight regions, wherein the low basis region(s) have a basis weight that is
not more
than about 80% of the basis weight of the high basis weight regions. In one
preferred
aspect, the first region is relatively high basis weight and comprises an
essentially
continuous network. The second region comprises a plurality of mutually
discrete
regions of relatively low basis weight and which are circumscribed by the high
basis
weight first region. In particular, a preferred cleaning sheet comprises a
continuous
region having a basis weight of from about 30 to about 120 grams per square
meter
and a plurality of discontinuous regions circumscribed by the high basis
weight
region, wherein the discontinuous regions are disposed in a random, repeating
pattern
and having a basis weight of not more than about 80% of the basis weight of
the
continuous region.
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 101 -
In one embodiment, the cleaning sheet will have, in addition to regions which
differ with regard to basis weight, substantial macroscopic three-
dimensionality. The
term "macroscopic three-dimensionality", when used to describe three
dimensional
cleaning sheets means a three dimensional pattern is readily visible to the
naked eye
when the perpendicular distance between the viewer's eye and the plane of the
sheet is
about 12 inches. In other words, the three dimensional structures of the pre-
moistened
sheets of the present invention are cleaning sheets that are non-planar, in
that one or
both surfaces of the sheets exist in multiple planes. By way of contrast, the
term
"planar", refers to sheets having fine-scale surface aberrations on one or
both sides,
the surface aberrations not being readily visible to the naked eye when the
perpendicular distance between the viewer's eye and the plane of the sheet is
about 12
inches. In other words, on a macro scale the observer will not observe that
one or
both surfaces of the sheet will exist in multiple planes so as to be three-
dimensional.
The measure for three-dimensionality is described in U.S. Patent No.
6,645,604 issued November 11, 2003 (Fereshtehkhou et al.) and U.S. Patent No.
6,561,354 issued May 13, 2003 (Fereshtehkhou et al.). Briefly, macroscopic
three-
dimensionality is described in terms of average height differential, which is
defined as
the average distance between adjacent peaks and valleys of a given surface of
a sheet,
as well as the average peak to peak distance, which is the average distance
between
adjacent peaks of a given surface. Macroscopic three dimensionality is also
described
in terms of surface topography index of the outward surface of a cleaning
sheet;
surface topography index is the ratio obtained by dividing the average height
differential of a surface by the average peak to peak distance of that
surface. In a
preferred embodiment, a macroscopically three-dimensional cleaning sheet has a
first
outward surface and a second outward surface wherein at least one of the
outward
surfaces has a peak to peak distance of at least about 1 mm and a surface
topography
index from about 0.01 mm to about 10 mm. The macroscopically three-dimensional
structures of the pre-moistened wipes of the present invention optionally
comprise a
scrim, which when heated aind the cooled, contract so as to provide further
macroscopic three-dimensional structure.
In another alternative embodiment, the substrate can comprise a laminate of
two
outer hydroentangled webs, such as nonwoven webs of polyester, rayon fibers or
I= I= I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 102 -
blends thereof having a basis weight of about 10 to about 60 grams per square
meter,
joined to an inner constraining layer, which can be in the form of net like
scrim
material which contracts upon heating to provide surface texture in the outer
layers..
The pre-moistened wipe is made by wetting the dry substrate with at least
about
1.0 gram of liquid composition per gram of dry fibrous web. Preferably, the
dry
substrate is wetted with at least about 1.5, and more preferably at least
about 2.0
grams of liquid composition per gram of the dry fibrous web. The exact amount
of
solution impregnated on the wipe will depend on the product's intended use.
For pre-
moistened wipes intended to be used for cleaning counter tops, stove tops,
glass etc.,
optimum wetness is from about 1 gram of solution to about 5 grams of solution
per
gram of wipe. In the context of a floor cleaning wipe, the pre-moistened
substrate can
preferably include an absorbent core reservoir with a large capacity to absorb
and
retain fluid. Preferably, the absorbent reservoir has a fluid capacity of from
about 5
grams to about 15 grams per gram of absorptive material.. Pre-moistened wipes
intended to be used for the cleaning of walls, exterior surfaces, etc. will
have a
capacity of from about 2 grams to about 10 grams of dry fibrous web.
A. Pre-Moistened Cleaning Wipe for Floors, Counters, and/or Walls
The hard surface cleaning compositions described hereinbefore can be used in
a pre-moistened wipe for general purpose, counter, wall and floor cleaning.
The
material descriptions and processes described herein are also applicable to
floor,
counter and wall applications. It is particularly advantageous in the context
of floor
wipes to have structures with three-dimensionality. The three-dimension
structure of
the substrates described above have been found to provide improved hair pick-
up
relative to planar sheets, which in a wet surface environment is surprising.
In a
preferred embodiment, the user advantageously uses slight weaving motions in
an up-
and-down wiping pattern to maximize hair pick-up. Three-dimensional cleaning
sheets particularly useful in the present invention are described in detail in
U.S. Patent
No. 6,561,354 issued May 13, 2003, Fereshtehkhou et al.
. Optimum wetness is from about 1 gram of solution to about 5 grams of
solution
per gram of wipe. In the context of a floor cleaning wipe, the pre-moistened
substrate
can optionally include an absorbent core reservoir with a large capacity to
absorb and
retain fluid. Preferably, the absorbent reservoir has a fluid capacity of from
about 5
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-103-
grams to about 15 grams per gram of absorptive material. Pre-moistened wipes
intended to be used for the cleaning of walls, exterior surfaces, etc. will
have a
capacity of from about 2 grams to about 10 grams of dry fibrous web.
Since there is no rinsing step in the context of a general purpose pre-
moistened
wipe, it is essential that the non-volatile content be kept to a minimum to
avoid
film/streak residue from product. Thus, the actives described herein, such as
surfactants, for incorporation in hard surface cleaning compositions are
preferably
used at even lower levels for best end result. Also, it has been found that
compositions consisting of primarily organic hydrophobic cleaning solvents can
deliver an excellent end result along with good cleaning in the context of a
general
purpose pre-moistened wipe for reasons similar to those described in pre-
moistened
glass wipes. Buffers with molecular weights of less than about 150 g/mole can
be
used advantageously to improve cleaning without harming end result
performance.
Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanol amine, ethanol amine,
2-
amino-2-methyl-l-propanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol, acetic acid,
glycolic acid and the like. Most preferred among these are ammonia, 2-
dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol and acetic acid. When used, these buffers
are
present in from about 0.005% to about 0.5%, with the higher levels being more
preferred for the more volatile chemicals. As in the case of glass wipes, the
inventors
have found that simple compositions using low levels of non-volatile
surfactant with
preferably high levels of the preferred organic cleaning solvent are
sufficient to
provide excellent cleaning and wetting performance even in the absence of the
hydrophilic polymer. However, the addition of polymer can advantageously be
used
to provide other benefits such as anti-spotting, antifogging and easier next-
time-
cleaning.
To provide added convenience general purpose pre-moistened wipes can be
attached to a mop head with a handle, an example of which is shown in Figures
5, 7,
7a and 8, which are described hereinafter. In such an execution the pre-
moistened
wipe is ideal for light cleaning and disinfecting. Since the amount of
solution released
from the wipe is much more limited than that delivered through conventional
cleaning, very effective anti-microbial systems need to be used. In one such
composition the general purpose and floor pre-moistened wipe can contain a
solution
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-104-
comprising an effective level of detergent surfactant and citric acid at about
0.5% to
about 5%. To boost the efficacy of such solution hydrogen peroxide or a source
of
hydrogen peroxide can be added at about 0.5% to about 3%. An alternative
composition could use quaternary ammonium salts such as dioctyl dimethyl
ammonium chloride, didecyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, C12, C14 and C16
dimethyl
benzyl ammonium chlorides, at levels greater than about 0.05%. Such compounds
have been found to often interfere with the benefits of the preferred
polymers. While
these solutions (e.g., those comprising sources of hydrogen peroxide,
quaternary
ammonium compounds and citric acid) deliver a high degree of anti-microbial
efficacy they can leave a filmy surface because they are solids and need to be
used at
high levels.
Better end result performance is delivered by compositions containing
primarily the organic cleaning solvents described above at from about 0.25% to
about
10%, more preferably about 0.5% to about 5% to provide cleaning and wetting,
in
combination with non-volatile buffers described above. Low levels of non-
volatiles
including hydrophilic polymer can advantageously be incorporated such that the
total
level of non-volatiles excluding perfume and antimicrobials, is from about 0%
to
about 0.08%, more preferably from about 0% to about 0.055%, most preferably
from
about 0% to about 0.025%. In a preferred embodiment, the combination of
surfactants, wetting polymers, buffers and hydrophobic organic cleaning
solvents are
chosen so as a provide a surface tension reduction from water (72 dynes/cm) of
more
than about 25 dynes/cm, more preferably more than 30 dynes/cm, most preferably
more than 35 dynes/cm. Optionally, low levels of more effective anti-microbial
ingredients such as bronopol, hexitidine sold by Angus chemical (211 Sanders
Road,
Northbrook, Illinois, USA), Kathon , 2-((hydroxymethyl) (amino)ethanol,
propylene
glycol, sodium hydroxymethyl amino acetate, formaldehyde, and glutaraldehyde,
quaternary ammonium salts such as dioctyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, didecyl
dimethyl ammonium chloride, C 12,C 14 and C16 dimethyl benzyl (Bardac 2280
and
Barquat MB-80 sold by Lonza), dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-
triazinetrione,
and more preferably 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one sold by Avicia Chemicals,
chlorhexidine diacetate sold by Aldrich-Sigma, sodium pyrithione and
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 105 -
polyhexamethylene biguanide at about 0.001% to about 0.1%, more preferably
from
about 0.005% to about 0.05% are added for preserving and/or providing
antimicrobial
benefits.
An important benefit of the wet wipes of the present invention is the fact
that
judicious selection of the antimicrobial actives combined with the lack of a
rinsing
step required by the invention, and lack of a buffing step (consumers are in
the habit
of cleaning floors and countertops to a wet end result), allow for residual
disinfectancy
benefits. By residual disinfectancy, it is meant that the residual
antimicrobial actives
delivered by the wet wipe onto the hard surface at least about 99.9% cidal
against
bacteria and other microorganisms for a period of from about 8 to about 72
hours,
more preferably from about 12 to about 48 hours, most preferably at least
about 24
hours. While residual disinfectancy can be achieved using conventional
approaches
(i.e., spray product with a paper towel, sponge, rag, etc.), the premoistened
wipe has
the added convenience of delivering the cleaning and disinfectancy benefits in
one
package. The residual properties result from a combination of low vapor
pressure and
high cidal efficacy of the antimicrobial actives associated with the
compositions of the
present invention. Those skilled in the art will recognize that residual
disinfectancy
benefits, if present in the context of compositions comprising a very low
level of
surfactant, are even more easily achieved in compositions wherein the level of
surfactants is raised. Residual disinfectancy, in addition to excellent end
result, can
provide consumers with reassurance as to the effectiveness of the wet wipe.
Such
reassurance is most important for tasks such as cleaning of surfaces that are
particularly susceptible to harboring germs, most particularly counter tops,
stove tops,
appliances, sinks, furniture, showers, glass and other fixtures that are near
or inside
the kitchen or bathroom(s).
Preferred antimicrobial actives for residual benefits as delivered from a wet
wipe or a dry wipe that becomes wet as a result of contact with a wet
composition
during the cleaning process, include Kathon , 2-((hydroxymethyl)
(amino)ethanol,
propylene glycol, sodium hydroxymethyl amino acetate, formaldehyde, and
glutaraldehyde, quaternary ammonium salts such as dioctyl dimethyl ammonium
chloride, octyl decyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, didecyl dimethyl ammonium
chloride, C12,C14 and C16 dimethyl benzyl (Bardac 2280 and Barquat MB-80
.. . _..... I 1 I.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-106-
sold by Lonza), dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-triazinetrione, and
more
preferably tetrakis(hydroxymethyl) phosphonium sulphate (THPS), 1,2-
benzisothiazolin-3-one sold by Avicia Chemicals, chlorhexidine diacetate sold
by
Aldrich-Sigma, sodium pyrithione and polyhexamethylene biguanide at about
0.001 %
to about 0.1%, more preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.05%. The specific
antimirobial actives and combinations thereof are chosen so as to be effective
against
specific bacteria, as desired by the formulator. Preferably, the antimicrobial
actives
are chosen to be effective against gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria,
enveloped and non-enveloped viruses, and molds that are commonly present in
consumer homes, hotels, restaurants, commercial establishments and hospitals.
Most
preferably, the antimicrobials provide residual disinfectancy against
Salmonella
choleraesuis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Staphylococcus aureus and Escherichia
coli,
and combinations thereof. Wherever possible, the antimicrobial actives are
chosen to
have residual disinfectancy benefits against more than one bacterial organism,
and
more preferably against at least one gram-negative organism and at least one
gram-
positive organism.
The inventors have found that residual disinfectancy can also be achieved or
enhanced using pH. Additionally, use of low levels of surfactants to reduce
surface
tension by more than about 25 dynes/cm, preferably more than about 30
dynes/cm,
can advantageously be used in combination with pH effects in the context of a
pre-
moistened wipe. Thus, compositions at a pH 10.5 or greater or a pH of 3 or
lower are
found to deliver the desired residual efficacy. The preferred hydrophilic,
substantive
polymer can be used to improve residuality, particularly for voltaile actives
such as
acetic acid. The use of pH can also help lower the level of the above actives
needed to
achieve residual. Preferred actives that are effective as a result of pH
include lactic
acid, glycolic acid, C8,C9,C10 fatty acids, sodium hydroxide, potassium
hydroxide.
Other suitable pre-moistened cleaning wipes that exhibit antimicrobial
effectiveness and residual antimicrobial effectiveness include those disclosed
in
This approach, i.e., using a combination of hydrophobic organic solvent plus
volatile buffer plus optionally low levels of non-volatile raw materials to
deliver a
superior end result, in combination with effective and low streaking
antimicrobials,
can be used in a variety of practical applications herein disclosed, including
general
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-107-
purpose cleaners, glass cleaners, glass cleaner wipes, solutions used with
disposable
pads (either with or without a handle to form a cleaning implement as
described
hereinafter).
Use of low levels of non-volatiles in the compositions of the invention
presents
a challenge for perfume incorporation. Some methods to improve solubility of
perfume are disclosed below. However, in certain instances, particularly when
hydrophobic perfumes are desired, perfume incorporation can be problematic. To
circumvent this issue, the inventors have advantageously found that perfume
delivery
can be achieved by directly applying concentrated perfume to either the wipe
(or pad).
In this manner, virtually any perfume can be used. In order to minimize any
residue
negatives that can be caused by the concentrated perfume, the perfume is
preferentially applied to the perimeter of the wipe or pad, or to areas that
do not
directly contact the surface to be treated. In another embodiment, perfume can
also be
added into the package containing the wipes. In similar fashion, use of low
levels of
non-volatile actives makes incorporation of effective suds suppressors into
the
aqueous composition more difficult. It has been found that suds suppressors
can more
easily, and more effectively be applied directly to the wipe to prevent suds
control. It
is found that this not only addresses a consumer perception of too much
sudsing, but
surprisingly also has shown an improved end result upon surface drying.
Furthermore,
it has been found that applying suds suppressor directly onto the wipes makes
process
a lot easier through better control of suds during manufacturing and
packaging.
Preferred suds suppressors are those that are effective at levels of no more
than about
0.1 grams of suds suppressor per gram of substrate, more preferably at levels
less than
about 0.01 grams suds suppressor per gram of substrate, most preferably, less
than
about 0.005 grams suds suppressor per gram of substrate. The most preferred
suds
suppressor in this context is DC AF, manufactured by the Dow Corning company.
The use of suds suppressors to improve surface appearance is particularly
significant
since these materials are effective at very low levels.
B. Pre-Moistened Cleaning Wipe for Glass
Pre-moistened wipes for use on glass can either be mono-layer or multi-
laminate. In the context of mono-laminates, since the surface is not wiped to
dryness
in the context of a pre-moistened wipe, it is essential that the non-volatile
content be
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 108 -
kept to a minimum. Thus, the actives described above are preferably used at
even
lower levels for best end result. Also, it has been found that compositions
consisting
solely of organic hydrophobic cleaning solvents can deliver an excellent end
result
along with good cleaning in a pre-moistened wipe. These solvents, as opposed
to the
aqueous hydrophilic solvents such as ethanol, isopropanol and the like, have
been
found to provide better and more even surface wetting. This is important as it
leads to
a more uniform drying, which provides reassurance to consumers that streaks
are not
going to form. Additionally, while not wishing to be limited by theory, it is
believed
that in a soiled environment, the hydrophobic organic cleaning solvents will
dry with
less streaking. For example, in the context of glass wipes current mono-layer
glass
wipes, e.g., Glassmates manufactured by Reckitt & Colman, which use
hydrophilic
solvents only (i.e., they lack hydrophobic organic cleaning solvent) dry in
spots. In
the context of a pre-moistened wipe, the cleaning solvents are employed in a
level of
from about 0.5% to about 10%, more preferably from about 1% to about 5%.
Preferred hydrophobic organic cleaning solvents include mono-propylene glycol
propyl ether, mono-propylene glycol butyl ether, mono-ethylene glycol butyl
ether and
mixtures thereof. Other aqueous hydrophilic solvents such as ethanol,
isopropanol,
isobutanol, 2-butanol, methoxypropanol and the like,can be used to provide
perfume
lift. Buffers with molecular weights of less than about 150 g/mole as
described above,
can be used advantageously to improve cleaning without harming end result
performance. Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanol amine,
ethanol amine, 2-amino-2-methyl-l-propanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-
propanol,
acetic acid, glycolic acid and the like. Most preferred among these are
ammonia, 2-
dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol and acetic acid. When used, these buffers
are
present in from about 0.005% to about 0.5%, with the higher levels being more
preferred for the more volatile chemicals. In the context of glass wipes,
simple
compositions using low levels of non-volatile surfactant with preferably high
levels of
the preferred organic cleaning solvent are sufficient to provide excellent
cleaning and
wetting performance even in the absence of the hydrophilic polymer. However,
the
addition of polymer can advantageously be used to provide other benefits such
as anti-
spotting, antifogging and easier next-time-cleaning.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 109 -
The art recognizes the use of pre-moistened wipes. For example, U.S. Patent
No. 4,276,338 discloses a multi-laminate absorbent article comprising adjacent
first
and second layers maintained together to improve wicking. U.S. Patent No.
4,178,407
discloses a single towel having absorbent surface on both sides that
additionally
comprises an inner layer impermeable to liquid. The towel is designed to have
little
wet strength and the layer of absorbent material consists of loose fibers. The
art also
discloses pre-moistened wipes for use in glass cleaner applications. U.S.
Patent No.
4,448,704 discloses an article suitable for cleaning hard surfaces such as
glass. The
article may be wet or consist of present within ruptural pouches. The article
of U.S.
Patent No. 4,448,704 is pre-washed with demineralized water or the solution
used to
impregnate said article; the liquid composition has a surface tension of less
than 35
dynes/cm, and preferably includes a surface-active agent and a partially
esterified resin
such as a partially esterified styrene/maleic anhydride copolymer.
The pre-moistened wipes of the present invention advantageously are not pre-
washed, yet the inventors have found that they deliver excellent end result
even as
single layered sheets. An additional benefit of the premoistened glass wipes
is to keep
linting at a minimum. Steps such as pre-washing typically loosens up fibers,
making
the substrate more prone to linting. In the context of hydroentangled
structures
specifically, the tightness of the fiber integration is optimally achieved in
processing
of the fibrous materials, not during the making or preparation of the pre-
moistened
wipe. As a result, preferred compositions of the present invention display
improved
linting. Additionally, the liquid composition used on the pre-moistened wipes
is
preferably substantially free of surface active agents. As such, the surface
tension of
the liquid does not need to reduce surface tension below 35 dynes/em. In the
context
of a multi-layered sheet of the present invention has two sides that differ in
function.
One side is pre-moistened and acts to deliver the liquid while the other is
preferably
not wet and is designed for buffing or finishing.
In the context of glass and other cleaning situations where lower levels of
liquid are required to reduce amount of liquids left on surfaces and grease
cleaning
efficacy is required, a preferred embodiment includes a dry fibrous web
substrate
where at least about 65% of the dry fibrous web is composed of hydrophobic
fibers
such as polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene and the like, and lower levels
of
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 110 -
hydrophilic fibers such as wood pulp, cotton, and the like are at levels of
less than
about 35%. The lower level of hydrophilic fibers helps reduce how much liquid
the
wipe can retain while the higher level of hydrophobic fibers helps to better
absorb
grease. Aside from benefits associated with improved grease cleaning, the
inventors
have found that hydrophobic fibers also improve the feel of the wipe on glass
and
other hard surfaces, providing an easier cleaning feel to both the consumer
and to the
surface being treated. This improved ease-of-cleaning, lubricity, or "glide"
can be
experimentally quantified by friction measurements on relevant hard surfaces.
Improved glide from the wipe provides additional freedom in the formulation of
the
liquid composition. Hydrophobic fibers provide glide benefits whether the wipe
is
completely pre-moistened and when the wipe is completely dry. This is
significant
since wipes become increasingly dry as they are used. Thus, the level of C14
or higher
chainlength surfactants which are known to provide lubricity benefits can be
substantially reduced or preferably altogether eliminated from the liquid
composition
used in the pre-moistened wipe while still preserving excellent glide (low
friction)
characteristics. The use of wipes comprising some level of hydrophobic fibers,
particularly polyester, also provides increased flexibility in formulating pre-
moistened
wipes for glass at acidic pH. It has been found that acidic cleaning
compositions
significantly hinder the glide of cellulosic substrates such as common paper
towels or
cellulosic pre-moistened wipes.
In addition to using material composition wipe dimension can also be used to
control dosing as well as provide ergonomic appeal. Preferred wipe dimensions
are
from about 5 1/2 inches to about 9 inches in length, and from about 5 1/2
inches to
about 9 inches in width to comfortably fit in a hand. As such, the wipe
preferably has
dimensions such that the length and width differ by no more than about 2
inches. In
the context of heavier soil cleaning, wipes are preferably bigger so that they
can used
and then folded, either once or twice, so as to contain dirt within the inside
of the fold
and then the wipe can be re-used. For this application, the wipe has a length
from
about 5%2 inches to about 13 inches and a width from about 10 inches to about
13
inches. As such, the wipe can be folded once or twice and still fit
comfortably in the
hand.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-111 -
In addition to having wipes prepared using a mono-layer substrate, it is
advantageous in some situations to have the pre-moistened wipe constructed
having
multiple layers. In a preferred embodiment, the wipe consists of a multi-
laminate
structure comprising a pre-moistened outer layer, an impermeable film or
membrane
inner layer and second outer-layer which is substantially dry. To improve the
wet
capacity of the wipe and to protect the back layer from getting prematurely
wet, an
optional absorbent reservoir can be placed between the pre-moistened first
outer-layer
and the impermeable film or membrane. Preferably, the dimensions of the
reservoir
are smaller than the dimensions of the two outer layers to prevent liquid
wicking from
the front layer onto the back layer.
The use of a multi-laminate structure as herein described can be highly
desirable in that it allows for a dry buffing step, aimed at substantially
removing most
of the liquid remaining on the glass following application of the wet side of
the pre-
moistened wipe on the glass. The inventors have found that even with a buffing
step,
hydrophilic polymer in the pre-moistened wipe, if present, remains on the
glass
providing anti-fog properties to the glass. The buffing step also provides
improved
overall flexibility in the level of solids used in the liquid composition
because most of
the solids are wiped up together with the remainder of the aqueous composition
during the buffing step. In fact, those skilled in the art can recognize that
it can be
advantageous to use very low levels, preferably less than about 0.02%, water-
soluble
though crystalline surfactants because of improved propensity for dry the
substrate to
remove such crystalline solids from the glass surface.
The multi-laminate structure is further advantageously used in the context of
heavier soiled situations, such as those encountered on outside windows or car
glass.
By allowing use of a fresh, clean surface for buffing, the multi-laminate
structure
reduces the amount of dirty liquid pushed around by the pre-moistened wipe.
When a multi-laminate structure is used, it is preferred that the outer pre-
moistened layer contain at least about 30% hydrophobic fibers for oil remove
and
glide. The impermeable inner layer is most preferably polyethylene,
polypropylene or
mixtures thereof, The composition mixture and thickness of the impermeable
layer is
chosen so as to minimize, or more preferably eliminate any seepage of liquid
from the
pre-moistened first outer-layer to the dry second outer-layer. Those skilled
in the art
I I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 112 -
will appreciate that use of a reservoir core or of a high fluid capacity pre-
moistened
outer-layer will test the impermeable layer, such that more than one
impermeable
layer can be required to ensure sufficient dryness for the second outer-layer
of the
wipe. The reservoir, if present, will preferably consist of treated or
untreated
cellulose, either as a stand alone material or as a hybrid with hydrophobic
fibers. The
hydrophobic content of the reservoir layer is preferably less than about 30%,
more
preferably less than about 20% by weight of the total fiber content of the
layer. In a
preferred embodiment, the reservoir consists of air-laid cellulose. The second
outer-
layer, which is substantially dry to the touch, preferably consists of high
absorbency
cellulose or blends of cellulose and synthetic fibers.
The inventors have recognized that packing of the wipes that contain a pre-
moistened side and a dry side can be challenging. To resolve this packing
issue, a
preferred folding scheme has been developed. The wipes are folded in either
halves,
thirds or in other other suitable way such that all of the pre-moistened sides
of each of
the wipes are folded inward and into each other. As a result, all of the outer
dry layers
of successive wipes piled into a pouch, container or box, do directly contact
any pre-
moistened wipe sides. By "directly contact", it is meant that all of the pre-
moistened
sides of the wipes are separated from dry sides by a liquid impermeable layer.
By
packing the wipes in such a preferred manner, it is ensured that the dry sides
of the
wipes do not become contaminated with liquid during storage in the wipes
container
and prior to use. 'The packing material can be made of any suitable material,
including
plastic or cellophane. Optionally, another means to further address potential
liquid
wicking into the buffing layer, is by simply adding superabsorbent polymer
into the
buffing layer or between the impermeable layer and the buffing layer.
In a preferred embodiment, a starter kit comprises a sturdy box or other
receptacle capable of holding from about eight to about twenty four wipes
which have
been folded at least once, and lower cost packages capable of holding from
about five
to about twelve wipes are used as refill packages.
Importantly, the pre-moistened wipe can be used as a stand-alone or in
conjunction with an implement comprising a handle and attachment device for
the
wipe. As used herein, implement signifies any physical means for attachment of
substrate, such as pad, dry wipe pre-moistened wipe, and the like. Optionally,
but
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 113 -
preferably, the pre-moistened wipe includes one or more preservatives so as to
ensure
fungistatic benefits. Examples of preservatives to be used in association with
the pre-
moistened wipes of the invention include methyl paraben, bronopol, hexetidine,
dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-triazinetrione, and quaternary ammonium
salts
including dioctyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, didecyl dimethyl ammonium
chloride, C12, C14 and C16 dimethyl benzyl (Bardac0 2280 and Barquat0 MB-80
sold by Lonza), and the like at concentrations below about 0.02%. Preferred
preservatives include citric acid, tetrakis (hydroxymethyl phosphonium sulfate
(THPS), sodium pyrithione, Kathon0 and 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one sold by
Avicia
Chemicals. The preservatives, if used, are in concentrations from about 0.001%
to
about 0.05%, more preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.02%. Alternatively,
preservation can be achieved using product pH, by making the pH of the aqueous
lotion squeezed out of the pre-moistened wipe either greater than about 10.5
or less
than about 3Ø Preferred pH-based preservatives include those which are
highly
volatile such as ammonia (for high pH) and acetic acid (for low pH). When pH-
based
preservatives are used, particularly when volatile preservatives are used, the
concentration of the preservative can be substantially higher than 0.02%. The
use of
wipes comprising hydrophobic fibers provides sufficient glide on the surface
so as to
even allow the use of acidic preservation agents. Additionally, a combination
of
preservatives can be used to achieve the desired preservation benefits. In any
event,
the preservative(s) can either be applied directly onto the wipe prior to the
solution, or
alternatively dispersed into the solution prior to moistening the wipe.
Alternatively, it can be beneficial to incorporate antimicrobials directly
into
the substrate. In this context, it is preferred to use highly water-insoluble
antimicrobial actives such as those derived from heavy metals. Examples of
insoluble
antimicrobials include zinc pyrithione, bismuth pyrithione, copper
naphthenate,
copper hydroxy quinoline, and the like. Other examples of actives, which do
not use
heavy metals, include dichloro-s-triazinetrione and trichloro-s-
triazinetrione.
V. Cleaning Implement
Referring to Figs. 5 and 6, an exemplary cleaning implement in the form of a
mop 20 made in accordance with one aspect of the present invention is
illustrated.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 114 -
The mop 20 comprises a handle 22, a support head or mop head 24 attached to
the
handle by a universal joint 25, and a liquid delivery system which includes at
least a
spray nozzle 26 preferably attached to the mop head 24, one such arrangement
being
described in U.S. patent no. 5,888,006 to Ping et al., issued March 30, 1999.
The
spray nozzle 26 is more preferably attached to the upper surface 27 of the mop
head
24, adjacent to its leading edge 29. In this way, the sprayer nozzle 26 moves
in the
direction of the mop head 24 when the mop 20 is maneuvered. Due to the force
which
is applied through the handle 22 when the mop 20 is maneuvered for mopping,
scrubbing, and the like by a user, the mop handle preferably has a Handle
Deflection
of less than about 15 mm, when measured according to the Handle Deflection
Test
Method described hereafter, and preferably has a deflection less than about 9
mm.
More preferably the handle 22 has a Handle Deflection of less than about 0.4
mm.
While the spray nozzle is preferably attached independent of the handle 22 for
directional control of the spray nozzle 26, it will be appreciated that the
spray nozzle
can be attached at locations other than the mop head 24. For example, the
spray
nozzle 26 can be attached to the universal joint 25 or the handle 22. In
addition, a
cleaning liquid can be applied by a spray nozzle which is not attached to the
mop 20.
For instance, as shown in Fig. 7, a mop 120 comprises a handle 22 attached to
a mop
head 124 by a universal joint 25 and a manually operated, hand-held liquid
sprayer 31
having a container storing the cleaning solution, or, alternatively, a self
contained
electrical, hand-held liquid sprayer 31 can be provided, both hand-held liquid
sprayers
having a spray nozzle 126. The hand-held liquid sprayers 31 are preferably
selected to
provide enough cleaning liquid 35 per actuation of the sprayer to cover an
adequate
area of the surface to be cleaned with a minimal number actuations for user
friendliness and to minimize hand fatigue. Low volume hand-held liquid
sprayers
typically dispense at least about 1 mil of liquid per actuation and high
volume hand-
held liquid sprayers typically dispense at least about 2 mils per actuation.
More
preferably, a low volume hand-held liquid sprayer dispenses between about I
mil and
about 2 mils per actuation and a high volume hand-held liquid spray dispenses
between about 2 mils per actuation and about 5 mils per actuation. An
exemplary low
volume manually operated hand-held liquid sprayer suitable for use with the
present
invention is model no. T8500 manufactured by Indesco, Inc. of Saint Peters,
MI. An
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-115 -
exemplary high volume manually operated hand-held liquid sprayer suitable for
use
with the present invention is model no. 813N manufactured by Indesco, Inc. of
Saint
Peters, MI. An exemplary electric hand-held liquid sprayer suitable for use
with the
present invention is model no. 460PH manufactured by Solo, Inc, of Newport
News,
VA. The hand-held liquid sprayer 31 is preferably stored in a cage 32 which is
attached to the handle 22. As shown in Fig. 7A, the cage 32 can further
include a
sleeve 37 with one or more screw type clamps 41 for securing the cage 32 about
the
handle 22. As will be appreciated, other types of mechanical fasteners known
in the
art can be used to secure the cage 32 to the handle 22. Further, other
structures for
releaseably securing the hand-held liquid sprayer to the mop 120 can be
employed.
For example, a shelf having an opening for receiving the sprayer could be
used. The
sleeve 37 can advantageously strengthen the handle 22, especially where the
handle 22
comprises one or more joints 43 and the sleeve 37 extends over a joint 43.
The cleaning implements made in accordance with the present invention (e.g.,
mop 20 and 120) use a removeably attached cleaning substrate 28 for absorbing
the
cleaning liquid and particulates from the surface to be cleaned. The cleaning
substrate
28 can be provided in one or more forms, such as a liquid absorbent pad (e.g.,
as
described hereinbefore in Section III), a cleaning sheet for dusting (e.g., as
described
hereinbefore in Section III), or a liquid pre-moistened wipe (e.g., as
described
hereinbefore in Section IV), etc. Optionally, a scrubbing strip 430 (Figs. 5
and 6) can
be adhesively attached adjacent to the leading edge 29 of a mop in combination
with a
cleaning substrate 28. The scrubbing strip 430 can be provided in a form as
previously discussed in Section III(G). In this context, the cleaning
substrate 28 can
remain attached to the mop. When scrubbing is required, a user of the mop
would
simply turn the mop around 90 degrees, place the mop head 24 in an upright
position
such that the leading edge 29 is contacting the floor. A further alternative
to placing
the scrubbing strip 430 adjacent the leading edge 29 is to place the scrubbing
strip
adjacent a side edge of the mop head 24. Again, the mop is turned 90 degrees
and the
mop head 24 is adjusted to an upright position to achieve scrubbing. The
cleaning
substrate 28 can be mechanically attached in a variety ways to mop head 24.
For
example, hook fasteners which are molded onto the lower surface of the mop
head 24
can be used in combination with loop fasteners attached to the cleaning fabric
28. As
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 116 -
shown in Fig. 8, the upper surface 27 the mop head 24 can further comprise a
plurality
of attachment structures 32 33 for attaching the cleaning substrate 28 to the
mop head
24. The attachment structures 32 33 can be provided in the form of those
described in
U.S. Patent No. 6,305,046 issued October 23, 2001 entitled CLEANING
IMPLEMENTS HAVING STRUCTURES FOR RETAINING A SHEET.
Alternatively, other attachment structures known in the art might be used. For
example, other flexible slitted structures might be used.
In accordance with another aspect of the present invention, a kit can be
provided which comprises the cage 32 and the container storing a cleaning
liquid
which is adapted for use with the hand-held liquid sprayer 126. Further, the
kit can
optionally contain one more cleaning substrates 28. The kit can further
include the
mop 120 and the remaining structures for a complete hand-held liquid sprayer
(e.g., a
sprayer head having the spray nozzle 126). A set of instructions can be
provided in
association with the kit, or with another article of manufactures (e.g., a
package
comprising merely the sprayer 126), which comprise an instruction, that for a
unit area
(e.g., every 1 m2), apply a liquid over the unit area, preferably evenly,
before mopping.
Depending upon the liquid delivered per stroke of the hand-held liquid
sprayer, the set
of instructions can further include one or more instructions directed to
applying a
select volume of liquid (e.g., between about 10 to 25 mis per square meter of
surface
area to be cleaned) per unit area of surface followed by an instruction to
move the
mop in a predetermined motion (e.g., up and/or down and/or in an overlapping
motion).
Referring to Fig. 9, the liquid delivery system further includes a canister 34
storing a liquid 35 and a gear pump 36 which is driven by an electric motor
38. The
liquid can be any type of liquid, although preferably the liquid 35 is a hard
surface
cleaning composition as described in Section II hereinbefore. A canister
housing 37
(Figs. 5 and 9) attached to the handle 22 removeably receives the canister 34.
The
canister housing 37 houses the gear pump 36, the electric motor 38, and a
voltage
source 39 which is used to power the electric motor 38. The voltage source 39
is
connected in series with a switch 40 attached to the handle 22. As described
more
fully hereafter, the characteristics of the spray nozzle (e.g., the quantity,
trajectory,
particle size, spray angle, etc.) and/or the balance of the liquid delivery
system (e.g.,
1 1- . 1
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 117 -
the voltage characteristics, pump and motor efficiencies, pump input and
output, etc.)
are configured to provide a mop 20 which provides maximum cleaning
effectiveness
in a user friendly implement. While the pump 36 is preferably provided in the
form of
a gear pump, other pumps and structures for pressurizing the liquid 35 to
deliver the
liquid to the spray nozzle 26 can be used. For example, vane, piston, lobe, or
diaphragm pumps would be acceptable for use. In addition, aerosols and other
compressed gas delivery systems can be used in place of an electric or
manually
driven pump. The gear pump 36 is attached to a pump housing 42 disposed within
the
canister housing 37. The pump housing 42 also has a recessed portion 44 for
receiving the canister 34. A fluid transfer fitment 46, such as that described
in U.S.
Patent No. 6,206,058 issued March 27, 2001 entitled INTEGRATED VENT AND
FLUID TRANSFER FITMENT, is disposed within the recessed portion 44. The fluid
transfer fitment 46 interfaces with the canister 34 to transfer the liquid 35
from the
canister 34 to the inlet 48 of the gear pump 36. The canister 34 has a closure
62
which preferably includes a venting arrangement such as that described in U.S.
Patent
No. 6,206,058 issued March 27, 2001.
A flexible fluid line 50 is connected to the pump outlet 54, which directs the
liquid 35 from the pump outlet 54 to the spray nozzle 26. A discharge check
valve 56
is located adjacent to and immediately upstream of the spray nozzle 26. The
check
valve 56 may be a spring loaded ball valve or other type of check valve
commonly
known in the art. The purpose of the check valve 56 is to limit dribbling of
liquid 35
from the spray nozzle 26. As discussed more fully hereafter, the cracking
pressure of
the check valve 56 should be sufficient so that the liquid entering the spray
nozzle 26
has sufficient energy to drive the fluid through the spray nozzle 26 and break
the fluid
up into fine droplets.
The electric motor 38 is preferably a direct current electric motor. The
electric
motor 38 has two electrical connections 58 and 60 to which is preferably
connected
the voltage source 39, which can be provided in the form of a plurality of
batteries.
When the switch 40 is closed, as shown in Fig. 9, a current flows through the
electric
motor 38 which rotates the gears of the pump 36 to generate a pressure
sufficient to
open the check valve 56 so that the liquid 35 can flow through the spray
nozzle 26.
An exemplary motor is a 3 volt to 6 volt series 200 or 300 motor manufactured
by
I = 1. 1
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-118 -
Mabuchi Industry Company, Ltd. of China while an exemplary spray nozzle is
manufactured by Bowles Fluidics Corporation of Columbia, MO. This exemplary
spray nozzle is more fully described in one or more of U.S. patent nos.
4,508,206 to
Stouffer, issued April 2, 1985; 5,788,394 to Hess et al., issued August 4,
1998; and
5,860,603 to Raghu et al., issued January 19, 1999. The handle 22, canister
housing
37, mop head 24, universal joint 25, and pump gears can be injection molded
using
thermoplastic materials as is known in the art. Preferably, the canister
housing 37 and
mop head 24 are formed from polypropylene, the universal joint 25 is formed
from
DELRIN, and the pump gears are formed from an Acetal co-polymer. The handle 22
can be formed from aluminum by extrusion. The voltage source 39 is preferably
four
AA, 1.5 volt Panasonic Alkaline Plus batteries which are connected in series.
Referring to Fig. 10, the spray nozzle 26 and the other various components of
the liquid delivery system are selected to provide a spray pattern 62 having
dimensions and one or more spray efficiencies which facilitate effective
cleaning with
the mop 20. As used herein, the phrase "spray pattern" is intended to refer to
the
shape and dimensions of the liquid surface deposition pattern at any given set
of
operating conditions (e.g., volumetric flow rate, inlet pressure to the spray
nozzle,
etc.). As used herein, the phrase "spray efficiency" can refer to any one of
three spray
efficiency parameters. First, the Rated Spray Efficiency which is intended to
refer to a
volumetric flow rate of the liquid 35 through a spray nozzle per unit area of
the spray
pattern. Second, T1200 Absorbent Capacity Spray Efficiency which is intended
to
refer to a volumetric flow rate of the liquid 35 through a spray nozzle per
unit area of
the spray pattern and per unit T1200 absorbent capacity of a cleaning
substrate 28 which
interacts with the sprayed liquid 35 during the cleaning process. Third,
Squeeze Out
Spray Efficiency which is intended to refer to a volumetric flow rate of the
liquid 35
through a spray nozzle per unit area of the spray pattern and per unit squeeze
out of a
substrate 25 which interacts with the sprayed liquid 35 during the cleaning
process.
T1200 Absorbent Capacity and Squeeze Out are more fully described in Sections
III
(I), VIII(A), VIII(B) herein. Iri other words, the spray efficiency can be
expressed in
units of either mils/(sec x cm), mils/(sec x cm2 x g/g), or mils/(sec x cm2 x%
squeeze
out/100). The various spray efficiencies are intended to be measures of the
cleaning
.. .. ._ . _ , ,
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 119 -
effectiveness of both the liquid delivery system itself and the combination of
the
liquid delivery system and the cleaning substrate 28.
Not intending to be bound by any theory, it is believed that the selection of
an
appropriate spray pattern and/or spray efficiency of the liquid delivery
system for a
cleaning implement can be useful for delivering effective cleaning and/or
doing so in
a user friendly manner. It is further believed that improved cleaning
performance can
be achieved when a specific volume of cleaning liquid is applied over a
relatively
large area. By applying a specific volume of cleaning liquid over a relatively
larger
area, the cleaning liquid typically will have a greater residence time on the
surface to
1o be cleaned which facilitates loosening and suspension of soil and other
particulates
before cleaning liquid is absorbed by cleaning substrate. Furthermore, when
the
cleaning substrate has high absorbent capacity as determined by T 1200
absorbent
capacity methods herein and/or a low squeeze-out as deterrnined by the test
methods
herein, covering a relatively larger surface area of floor as compared to a
smaller area
with the same volume cleaning liquid can be more desirable, because if said
volume
of cleaning liquid is dispensed in too small of an area, the cleaning
substrate might
absorb a large portion of the cleaning liquid prematurely before a user has a
chance to
effectively mop an adequate amount of surface area. This can lead to user
convenience problems as a user of the mop might be forced to stop mopping more
often than desired to apply additional cleaning liquid. Alternatively, a user
might get
inconsistent cleaning results between areas where there was adequate liquid
coverage
versus areas with inadequate coverage from wiping a partially wet or even dry
floor.
While it is preferred that the liquid delivery system provides a spray pattern
which is
larger rather than smaller, a spray pattern that covers too large of an area
can create
other problems. For example, if the spray pattern is too large, a user may not
be able
to reach all of the floor area saturated with the cleaning liquid with the
cleaning
implement without stepping into the spray pattern area. Additionally, a spray
pattern
which is too wide could make it difficult to conveniently cleanin more
confined
situations (e.g., in a bathroom) without depositing cleaning liquid on
undesired
surfaces such as walls and the like. In fact this is an example of where a
smaller spray
pattern could actually be preferred. If the smaller spray pattern is desired,
the cleaning
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-120-
substrate could be provided with a relatively lower T1200 absorbent capacity
and/or a
relatively higher squeeze-out to minimize premature absorption of the cleaning
liquid.
In order to achieve the desired spray patterns and spray efficiencies, the
liquid
delivery system can be configured to provide the desired spray pattern and/or
spray
efficiencies or a user can be instructed to maneuver the mop in a particular
manner. A
preferred set of instructions can be provided in association with an article
of
manufacture, such as a package, for cleaning implements having liquid delivery
systems which produce a relatively small spray pattern (e.g., less than about
0.1 m2 ),
wherein an instruction is provided to actuate the liquid delivery system for a
predetermined amount of time for a predetermined surface area to be cleaned
(e.g., for
about every 1 m2 apply the cleaning liquid by actuating the liquid delivery
system for
between about 2 seconds and about 8 seconds) by sweeping the cleaning
implement
from side-to-side with the cleaning implement lifted above the surface to be
cleaned.
Alternatively or in addition to the previous instruction, another instruction
could
instruct the user of the cleaning implement to move the cleaning implement in
an up
and down motion and/or in an overlapping motion while it is lifted above the
surface
to be cleaned: Either of the previously described instructions can be
implemented
with the nozzle pointed in a downward direction toward the surface to be
cleaned.
Another preferred set of instructions can be provided in association with an
article of
manufacture, such as a package, for cleaning implements having liquid delivery
systems which produce a relatively large spray pattern (e.g., between about
0.1 m2 and
about 0.4 m2), wherein an instruction is provided to actuate the liquid
delivery system
for a predetermined amount of time for a predetermined surface area to be
cleaned
(e.g., for about every 1 m2 apply the cleaning liquid by actuating the liquid
delivery
system for between about 2 seconds and about 8 seconds) by moving the cleaning
implement on the floor in a predetermined motion (e.g., up and down, side to
side, or
in an overlapping motion).
An alternative approach is to provide a spray pattern that can be adjusted by
a
user of the cleaning implement to be larger or smaller depending upon the
surface to
be cleaned and/or the surrounding structures which must be cleaned around.
As shown in Fig. 10, the spray pattern 62 (the phrase "spray pattern" is
intended to refer to the pattern generated by a single nozzle 26) has a spray
depth 64, a
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 121 -
spray width 66, a mop head overspray 68, and a spray gap 70. As used herein,
the
phrase "spray depth" is intended to refer to the distance from line 71, which
is where
less than 0.1 mils 0.05 mils of the sprayed liquid is first deposited on a
surface to be
cleaned, to the line 72 such that 90% + 2% of the liquid sprayed by the spray
nozzle
26 is within the area 74 bounded by the spray angle lines 76 and 78 and the
lines 71
and 72. The spray angle lines 76 and 78 are defined by the spray angle 80 of
the spray
nozzle 26. The phrase "spray angle" is intended to refer to the angle 80
between the
lines 76 and 78 such that 95% + 2% of the liquid sprayed by the nozzle 26
falls within
the open ended triangle formed by the lines 76 and 78. As used herein, the
phrase
"mop head overspray" is intended to refer to the distance which the spray
pattern 62
extends beyond the side edges 82 of the cleaning substrate 28. As used herein,
the
phrase "spray gap" is intended to refer to the distance from the exit plane 84
of the
spray nozzle 26 to the line 71 where O.lmils + 0.05 mils of the first liquid
deposition
occurs. Table 1 sets forth the spray pattern dimensions which are preferred in
order to
provide previously described user and cleaning benefits. The dimensions set
forth in
Tables I and 2 are intended to refer to spray pattern dimensions at any
operating
condition of the liquid delivery system of a cleaning implement. More
preferably, the
spray pattern dimensions of Tables 1 and 2 are intended to refer the
dimensions
generated by a liquid delivery at both its maximum intended spray nozzle inlet
pressure and maximum spray nozzle volumetric flow rate during normal use. As
used
herein, the phrase "spray nozzle inlet pressure" is intended to refer to the
gage
pressure at either the spray nozzle inlet or, if a check valve is provided
immeadiately
upstream of the spray nozzle, to the gage pressure at the inlet to the check
valve.
Most preferably, the spray pattern dimensions of Tables 1 and 2 are intended
to refer
to the dimensions generated by a liquid delivery system comprising a spray
nozzle, a
pump, an electric motor, a check valve, and a battery voltage source, wherein
the
spray pattern dimensions are generated at the maximum intended voltage of the
battery voltage source during normal use. As used herein, the phrase "maximum
intended voltage" is intended to refer to the voltage across electric motor
terminals 58
and 60 when the voltage source is fully charged. Exemplary ranges for the
above-
described pressure, flow rate, and voltage operating conditions are discussed
in further
detail hereafter.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-122-
TABLE I
Depth 64 Width 66 Mop Head Spray Gap 70
Overspray 68
Preferred At least about At least about At least about At least about 0
Range 20 cm 20 cm 0 cm cm
More Between about Between about Between about Between about
Preferred 20 cm and 20 cm and 0 cm and about 0 cm and about
Range about 90 cm about 90 cm 30 cm 30 cm
Most Between about Between about Between about Between about
Preferred 30 cm and 30 cm and 0 cm and about 5 cm and about
Range about 60 cm about 60 cm 15 cm 15 cm
Table 2 sets forth the preferred spray pattern dimensions of Table 1 as a
percentage of
the spray pattern dimension divided by the width 84 of the cleaning substrate
28.
TABLE 2
Depth 64 Width 66
Preferred Range At least about At least about
60% 60%
More Preferred Between about Between about
Range 60% and about { 60% and about
300% 300%
Most Preferred Between about Between about
Range 100% and 100% and
about 200% about 200%
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 123 -
The T1200 Absorbent Capacity Spray Efficiency of the mop 20 is at least about
0.000006 mils/(sec x cm2 x g/g) and preferably is between about 0.000006
mils/(sec x
cm2 x g/g) and about 0.01 mils/(sec x cmZ x g/g). More preferably, the T1200
Absorbent Capacity Spray Efficiency of the mop 20 is between about 0.0003
mils/(sec
x cm2 x g/g) and about 0.0004 mils/(sec x cm2 x g/g). The Squeeze Out Spray
Efficiency of the mop 20 is at least about 0.0006 mils/(sec x cm2 x (per unit
Squeeze
Out)) and preferably is between about 0.0006 mils/(sec x cm2 x (per unit
Squeeze
Out)) and about 1 mils/(sec x cm2 x (per unit Squeeze Out)), wherein per unit
Squeeze
Out is (%Squeeze Out)/100. More preferably, the Squeeze Out Spray Efficiency
of
the mop 20 is between about 0.05 mils/(sec x cm2 x (per unit Squeeze Out)) and
about
0.01 mils/(sec x cm2 x (per unit Squeeze Out)). The Rated Spray Efficiency is
at least
about 0.0002 mils/(sec x cm2) and more preferably is between about 0.0002
mils/(sec
x cm') about 0.02 mils/(sec x cm2). More preferably, the Rated Spray
Efficiency is
between about 0.001 mils/(sec x cm2) and about 0.002 mils/(sec x cmZ).
While the spray pattern 62 has been described herein according the absolute
and relative dimensions of the spray pattern 62, the spray pattern 62 can also
be
characterized according to exit conditions at the spray nozzle 26, in
particular the
average exit velocity, spray angle, and average drop size of the spray exiting
the spray
nozzle 26. As used herein, the phrase "average exit velocity" is intended to
refer to
the velocity of the liquid spray at the exit plane 84 of the spray nozzle 26,
which is
equal to the volumetric flow rate of the liquid divided by the exit area of
the spray
nozzle 26. The average exit velocity of the nozzle 26 is at least about 0.009
cm/sec
and more preferably is between about 0.009 cm/sec and about 0.9 cm/sec. Most
preferably, the average exit velocity is between about 0.01 cm/sec and about
0.02
cm/sec. These preferred average exit velocity ranges are further preferably
combined
with a spray nozzle 26 having a spray angle 80 of at least about 30 degrees
and/or an
average liquid particle size of at least about 100um and more preferably with
a spray
angle 80 between about 30 degrees and about 120 degrees and/or an average
liquid
particle size of between about 100 m and about 3050 m. Most preferably,
average
exit velocity ranges are combined with a spray angle 80 of between about 50
and
about 75 degrees and/or an average liquid particle size of between about 500
m to
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-124-
about 1050 m. The above-described spray nozzle exit conditions are intended
to
refer to spray nozzle exit conditions at any operating condition of the liquid
delivery
system of a cleaning implement. More preferably, the above-described spray
nozzle
exit conditions are intended to refer spray nozzle exit conditions generated
by a liquid
delivery at both its maximum intended spray nozzle inlet pressure and maximum
volumetric flow rate during normal use. Most preferably, the above-described
spray
nozzle exit conditions are intended to refer spray nozzle exit conditions
generated by a
liquid delivery system comprising a spray nozzle, a pump, an electric motor, a
check
valve, and a battery voltage source, wherein the spray nozzle exit conditions
are
generated at the maximum intended voltage of the battery voltage source during
normal use. Exemplary ranges for the above-described pressure, flow rate, and
voltage operating conditions are discussed in further detail hereafter.
The various components of the liquid delivery system of the mop 20 cooperate
in order to achieve the previously described preferred spray patterns and/or
spray
efficiencies over an adequate period of time so that a user of the mop 20
receives
relatively consistent spraying performance over the useful life of the voltage
source
39. In a preferred approach, the gear pump 36 delivers a volumetric flow rate
of at
least about 2 mils/sec and more preferably has a volumetric flow rate between
about 2
mils/sec and about 20 mils/sec. Most preferably, the gear pump 36 delivers a
volumetric flow rate between about 3 mils/sec and about 10 mils/sec. Moreover,
the
gear pump 36 delivers the above-described volumetric flow rates at a spray
nozzle
inlet pressure of at least about 6 Kpa and more preferably at a spray nozzle
inlet
pressure of between about 6 Kpa and about 320 Kpa. Most preferably, the gear
pump
36 delivers the above-described volumetric flow rates at a spray nozzle inlet
pressure
between about 50 Kpa and about 160 Kpa. For a liquid delivery system
comprising a
spray nozzle, a pump, an electric motor, a check valve, and a battery voltage
source,
the previously described pump flow rates and spray nozzle inlet pressures are
generated at the maximum intended voltage of the battery voltage source during
normal use.
Moreover, the pump 36 delivers the above-described volumetric flow rates and
spray nozzle irilet pressures for a time period of continuous pump operation
of at least
about 5 minutes and more preferably for a time period of continuous pump
operation
I I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-125-
(as opposed to cyclical pump operation) of at least about 15 minutes. Most
preferably,
the pump 36 delivers the subject volumetric flow rates and spray nozzle inlet
pressures for a time period of continuous pump operation between about 5
minutes
and 20 minutes. In order to achieve these periods of continuous pump
operation, the
voltage input to the terminals 58 and 68 of electric motor 38 is at least
about 1.5 volts
over the subject time periods of continuous pump operation. More preferably,
the
voltage input to the terminals 58 and 68 is between about 1.5 volts and about
6 volts
over the subject time periods of continuous pump operation. Most preferably,
the
voltage input to the terminals 58 and 68 is between about 1.8 volts to about
3.6 volts
over the subject periods of continuous pump operation. Exemplary voltage,
volumetric flow rate, and spray nozzle inlet pressure plots as a function of
continuous
pump operation for a cleaning implement made in accordance with the present
invention are illustrated in Fig. 11.
The volumetric flow rate and spray nozzle inlet pressure at a given voltage is
also a function of the efficiencies of the pump 36 and/or the electric motor
38. The
efficiency of the pump 36 is at least about 3% and more preferably is at least
about 6
% and most preferably is at least about 12%. Most preferably, the efficiency
of the
pump is between about 3% and about 30%. The electric motor efficiency is at
least
about 50 % and more preferably is at least about 70 % and most preferably is
between
about 70% about 100%. As used herein, the term "motor efficiency" or "pump
efficiency" is intended to refer to the ratio of pump or motor output to its
input. As
will be appreciated, a given volumetric flow rate and/or spray nozzle inlet
pressure at
a given voltage can be increased by increasing the pump and/or electric motor
efficiencies which, in turn, will upwardly shift the pressure and volumetric
rate curves
of Fig. 11.
Referring again to Fig. 9, while the canister 34 is preferably situated above
the
pump 36 so that a static head is provided to the pump inlet 48 for priming of
the
pump, the canister 34 is also preferably substantially non-deformable (i.e.,
the walls of
the canister do not measurably deflect to substantially affect generation of
suction or
sub-atmospheric pressure P2 within the canister 34) at the pump generated
pressure
differential of P, minus P2. Preferably the difference between the static
pressure P2
and the pressure Pj, the latter being equal to atmospheric pressure, when the
pump 48
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-126-
is priming (i.e., when the gears of the pump 36 have become immersed in the
liquid
35) is sufficient to open the venting valve 86 as quickly as possible. In a
preferred
arrangement, the vent valve 86 has an opening or cracking pressure of at least
about
0.6 Kpa and more preferably is between about 0.6 Kpa and about 20 Kpa for ease
of
s pump priming. In other words, the pump 36 is able to generate a static
suction
pressure P2 of at least about 0.7 Kpa within the canister 34 and more
preferably the
static suction pressure is between about 0.7 Kpa and about 20.1 Kpa. Most
preferably, the vent valve 86 has a cracking pressure of between about 1 Kpa
and
about 10 Kpa and the pump 36 is able to generate a static pressure P2 of
between
about 1.1 Kpa and about 10.1 Kpa. In the event that the pump 36 is unable to
develop
a suction pressure P2 which is sufficient to open the vent valve 86, the user
of the mop
can be instructed to squeeze the canister 34 to assist in priming the pump 36.
For
example, a set of instructions provided in association with an article of
manufacture
(such as a kit or package comprising the mop 20) which comprise an instruction
to
15 squeeze the canister 34 either before, during and/or after actuation of the
pump 36.
TEST METHODS
The following procedures are useful for determination of parameters used to
evaluate the cleaning implements of the present invention. In particular,
these
20 procedures are used to characterize the performance of a cleaning
implement.
Specific units may be suggested in connection with measurement and/or
calculation of
parameters described in the procedures. These units are provided for exemplary
purposes only. Other units consistent with the intent and purpose of the
procedures
can be used.
Handle Deflection Test Method
This procedure is used to determine the Handle Deflection of a cleaning
implement. Referring to Fig. 12, the handle 22 is placed upon a first support
cradle 87
and a second support cradle 88, wherein the support cradles 87 and 88 are
disposed at
about the ends 89 and 90 of the handle 22. The support cradles 87 and 88
should
simply support the handle 22. A dial indicator 91, such as model no. ID-C150EB
having a range of 0.001 mm to 50.8 mm which is manufactured by Mitutoyo of
Japan
is placed at the midpoint 92 of the handle 22 and a first reading is recorded.
A 5 kg
I = I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-127-
weight is applied at the midpoint 92 of the handle 22. After 10 minutes, a
second
reading is recorded. The Handle Deflection is difference between the first
reading and
the second reading.
The following are illustrative examples of application of the Handle
Deflection Test
Method:
Example I
A handle having a length of 94 cm, an outside diameter of 22 mm and an inside
diameter of 16mm, and which is made from aluminum is placed between the first
and
second cradles 87 and 88. The first reading is 0.299 mm and the second reading
is
1.001 mm. Therefore, the Handle Deflection is 0.702 mm.
Example 2
A handle having a length of 91 cm, an outside diameter of 22 mm and an inside
diameter of 16 mm, and which is made from aluminum is placed between the first
and
second cradles 87 and 88. The first reading is 0.005 mm and the second reading
is
0.395 mm. Therefore, the Handle Deflection is 0.390 mm.
Spra.y Pattern Test Methods
These procedures are used to determine the spray pattern of a cleaning
implement. The test procedures are described herein for purposes of clarity
with
respect to an exemplary mop. As will be appreciated, however, the subject test
methods can be used to evaluate any cleaning implement however configured.
These
spray pattern test methods are intended to be applied to cleaning implements
on a per
spray nozzle basis. The water which is sprayed by the mop is dyed, using any
dye as
is known in the art.
a) Spray Depth
The dimension of a spray depth is determined as follows. The leading edge of
the subject mop is situated adjacent a rectangular first absorbent sheet whose
dimensions are sufficient to capture at least 98% of the water discharged by
the mop.
The first absorbent sheet can be any absorbent sheet which substantially
absorbs the
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 128 -
sprayed water upon impact with the sheet and which has a water impermeable
barrier
on the bottom side so that the water absorbed by the sheet is retained by the
sheet. A
satisfactory absorbent sheet is manufactured by Buckeye Absorbant
Technologies, Inc.
of Memphis, TN under the tradename VIZORBPLUSTM. This preferred absorbent
sheet is an air-laid tissue comprising three components, namely a celluose
pulp, bi-
component fibers, and an absorbent gel material, wherein the absorbent sheet
material
has an absorbent capacity of at least 17 gm of saline solution per gram of
sheet
material. The first absorbent sheet is weighed to determine its dry weight.
After
priming the mop, a water spray is discharged from the spray nozzle until at
least 10
mils of water has been discharged, wherein at least the volumetric flow rate
and spray
nozzle inlet pressure are at the maximum values for the intended use of the
subject
mop during the discharge. The first absorbent sheet is weighed (the wet
weight) and
the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight of
water
captured by the first absorbent sheet. This water weight is converted to a
volume as is
known in the art. If the water volume captured by the absorbent sheet is
greater than
95% of the water volume discharged by the spray nozzle, then a second
absorbent
sheet will be tested, wherein the depth 93 (Fig. 13) of the second absorbent
sheet is
98% of depth 93 of the first absorbent sheet. If less than 95% of the water
volume is
captured by the first absorbent sheet, a larger first absorbent sheet is
tested until
greater than 95% of the water is captured by the absorbent sheet and
thereafter a
second absorbent sheet is tested as described herein. The second absorbent
sheet, as
well as each subsequent absorbent sheet herein, is made from the same material
as the
first absorbent sheet. The second absorbent sheet is weighed (the dry weight).
After
priming the mop, a water spray is discharged from the spray nozzle until at
least 10
mils of water has been discharged, wherein at least the volumetric flow rate
and spray
nozzle inlet pressure are at the maximum values for the intended use of the
subject
mop during the discharge. The second absorbent sheet is weighed (the wet
weight)
and the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight
of water
captured by the second absorbent sheet. This water weight is converted to a
volume
as is known in the art. If the water volume captured by the second absorbent
sheet is
greater than 90 + 2% of the water volume discharged by the spray nozzle, then
a third
absorbent sheet is tested, wherein the depth 93 of the third absorbent sheet
is 98% of
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-129-
depth of the second absorbent sheet. The above-described process is repeated
until
90% + 2% of the water discharged by the spray nozzle is captured by the
absorbent
sheet. Once this absorbent sheet has captured a water volume which is 90% + 2%
of
the volume discharged by the spray nozzle, the depth 93 of this sheet is
measured and
this dimension is the depth of the spray pattern.
b) S12ray Angle
The spray angle is deterrnined as follows. In the event that the spray pattern
is
generally triangular in shape (i.e., which has a generally triangular shape in
a planar
projection), the spray angle can be determined in a manner similar to that
used to
determine the spray depth. Namely, a first absorbent sheet which is large
enough to
capture at least 98% of the sprayed water is placed in front of the mop. The
first
absorbent sheet is in the form of an equilateral triangular, as shown in Fig.
13A,
wherein the angle 95 of the apex of the absorbent sheet which is adjacent the
spray
nozzle is large enough to capture at least 98% of the water volume discharged
by
spray nozzle within the triangle defined by the apex. The first absorbent
sheet is
weighed to determine its dry weight. After priming the mop, a water spray is
discharged from the spray nozzle until at least 10 mils of water has been
discharged,
wherein at least the volumetric flow rate and spray nozzle inlet pressure are
at the
maximum values for the intended use of the subject mop during the discharge.
The
first absorbent sheet is weighed (the wet weight) and the wet weight is
subtracted
from the dry weight to determine the weight of water captured by the first
absorbent
sheet. This water weight is converted to a volume as is known in the art. If
the water
volume captured by the absorbent sheet is greater than 98% of the water volume
discharged by the spray nozzle, then a second absorbent sheet will be tested,
wherein
the angle of the apex is 98% of the angle of the apex of the first absorbent
sheet. If
less than 98% of the water volume is captured by the first absorbent sheet, a
larger
first absorbent sheet is tested until greater than 98% of the water is
captured by the
absorbent sheet and thereafter a second absorbent sheet is tested as described
herein.
The second absorbent sheet is weighed (the dry weight). After priming the mop,
a
water spray is discharged from the spray nozzle until at least 10 mils of
water has been
discharged, wherein at least the volumetric flow rate and spray nozzle inlet
pressure
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-130-
are at the maximum values for the intended use of the subject mop during the
discharge. The second absorbent sheet is weighed (the wet weight) and the wet
weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight of water
captured by
the second absorbent sheet. This water weight is converted to a volume as is
known
in the art. If the water volume captured by the second absorbent sheet is
greater than
95 + 2% of the water volume discharged by the spray nozzle, then a third
absorbent
sheet is tested, wherein the angle 95 of the apex of the third absorbent sheet
is 98% of
angle 95 of the apex of the second absorbent sheet. The above-described
process is
repeated until 95% + 2% of the water discharged by the spray nozzle is
captured by
the absorbent sheet. Once this absorbent sheet has captured a water volume
which is
95% + 2% of the volume discharged by the spray nozzle, the angle 95 of the
apex
adjacent the spray nozzle is measured and this dimension is the spray angle of
the
spray pattern.
c) Spray Width
The spray width is determined as follows. For sprays which are not fan-
shaped, the width of the spray pattern is the width, at a previously
determined depth of
the spray pattern, which is sufficient to define a box which is wide enough to
capture
all of the water up to the depth of the spray pattern. For spray patterns
which are
triangular in shape, the spray width is defined by the spray angle and the
spray depth
as previously determined.
d) Spray Gap
The spray gap is determined as follows. The leading edge of the mop is
situated adjacent a rectangular first absorbent sheet whose dimensions are
sufficient to
capture less than 10% of the water discharged by the mop. The first absorbent
sheet is
weighed to determine its dry weight. After priming the mop, a water spray is
discharged from the spray nozzle until at least 10 mils of water has been
discharged,
wherein at least the volumetric flow rate and spray nozzle inlet pressure are
at the
maximum values for the intended use of the subject mop during the discharge.
The
first absorbent sheet is weighed (the wet weight) and the wet weight is
subtracted
from the dry weight to determine the weight of water captured by the first
absorbent
i I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 131 -
sheet. This water weight is converted to a volume as is known in the art. If
the water
volume captured by the absorbent sheet is greater than 5% of the water volume
discharged by the spray nozzle, then a second absorbent sheet will be tested,
wherein
the depth 93 (Fig. 13) of the second absorbent sheet is 98% of depth of the
first
absorbent sheet. The second absorbent sheet is weighed (the dry weight). After
priming the mop, a water spray is discharged from the spray nozzle until at
least 10
mils of water has been discharged, wherein at least the volumetric flow rate
and spray
nozzle inlet pressure are at the maximum values for the intended use of the
subject
mop during the discharge. The second absorbent sheet is weighed (the wet
weight)
and the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight
of water
captured by the second absorbent sheet. This water weight is converted to a
volume
as is known in the art. If the water volume captured by the second absorbent
sheet is
greater than 0.1 mils + 0.05 mils of the water volume discharged by the spray
nozzle,
then a third absorbent sheet is tested, wherein the depth 93 of the third
absorbent sheet
is 98% of the depth 93 of the second absorbent sheet. The above-described
process is
repeated until 0.1 mils + 0.05 mils of the water discharged by the spray
nozzle is
captured by the absorbent sheet. Once this absorbent sheet has captured a
water
volume which is 0.1 mils + 0.05 mils of the volume discharged by the spray
nozzle,
the depth 93 of this sheet is measured and this dimension is the spray gap of
the spray
pattern.
e) Spray Pattern Area
The spray pattern area is determined as follows. For triangular shaped sprays,
the spray pattern area is the area bounded by the spray depth, the spray angle
lines as
set by the spray angle, and the spray gap, if any. For non-triangular shaped
sprays, the
spray pattern area is the rectangular area bounded by the spray depth and the
spray
width.
Spray Efficiency Test Methods
This procedure is used to determine the various spray efficiencies of a
cleaning
implement. This test procedure is described herein for purposes of clarity
with respect
to an exemplary mop. As will be appreciated, however, the subject test method
can be
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-132-
used to evaluate any cleaning implement however configured. The water which is
sprayed by the mop is dyed, using any dye as is known in the art.
The spray pattern of the subject mop is first determined according to the
Spray
Pattern Test Methods. The mop is next situated before an absorbent sheet such
that
the leading edge over which the water spray projects during use is directly
adjacent to
the absorbent sheet. The first absorbent sheet can be any absorbent sheet
which
substantially absorbs the sprayed water upon impact with the sheet and which
has a
water impermeable barrier on the bottom side so that the water absorbed by the
sheet
is retained by the sheet. A satisfactory absorbent sheet is manufactured by
Buckeye
Absorbant Technologies, Inc. of Memphis, TN under the tradename VIZORBPLUSTM
. This preferred absorbent sheet is an air-laid tissue comprising three
components,
namely a celluose pulp, bi-component fibers, and an absorbent gel material,
wherein
the absorbent sheet material has an absorbent capacity of at least 17 gm of
saline
solution per gram of sheet material. The shape and dimensions of the absorbent
sheet
match the spray pattern dimensions (i.e., depth, width, spray angle, spray
gap)
previously determined above and the absorbent sheet is aligned with the spray
nozzle
so that the orientation of the absorbent sheet matches the spray pattern of
the nozzle.
The absorbent sheet is weighed prior to wetting (i.e., the dry weight of the
absorbent sheet). After priming the mop, a water spray is discharged from the
spray
nozzle until at least 10 mils of water is sprayed, wherein at least the
average exit
velocity and spray angle at the exit plane of the spray nozzle are at the
maximum
values for intended use of the subject cleaning implement. The elapsed time
(in
seconds) of discharge is monitored and recorded. The absorbent sheet is
weighed
after completion of the water spray discharge (i.e., the wet weight of the
absorbent
sheet). The difference between the measured absorbent sheet weights is the
weight of
water which was absorbed by the absorbent sheet. The weight of water is
converted to
a volume of water (in mils), as is known in the art.
The T1200 Absorbent Capacity Spray Efficiency is calculated as follows,
wherein the
T1200 Absorbent Capacity value (in g/g) is the value for a selected cleaning
substrate
of interest:
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-133-
T1200 Absorbent Capacity Spray Efficiency = ((Volume of Water Absorbed/time
of discharge)/(Spray Pattern Area x T1200 Absorbent Capacity)
The Squeeze Out Spray Efficiency is calculated as follows, wherein the Squeeze
Out
value (as %/100) is the value for a selected cleaning substrate of interest:
Squeeze Out Spray Efficiency =((Volume of Water Absorbed/time of
discharge)/(Spray Pattern Area x Squeeze Out)
The Rated Spray Efficiency is calculated as follows:
Rated Spray Efficiency = ((Volume of Water Absorbed/time of discharge)/(Spray
Pattern Area)
Removable CleaningPad and/or Sheet
The present invention is based on the convenience of a cleaning pad,
preferably disposable, that provides significant cleaning benefits. The
cleaning
performance benefits are related to the structural characteristics of the
present
cleaning pad as described hereinbefore, combined with the ability of the pad
to
remove and retain solubilized soils. The cleaning pad and/or sheet can be
designed to
be used in conjunction with a handle to provide a cleaning implement. As a
removable, preferably disposable, cleaning pad, the cleaning pad preferably
comprises
an attachment layer, as described hereinbefore. The attachment layer
preferably
comprises a clear or translucent polyethylene film and/or hook and loop
technology or
adhesive tape.
In an alternative embodiment, the attachment layer 403 of a cleaning pad 400
as shown in Figure 4b can be designed such that the y-dimension (width) of the
attachment layer is greater than the y-dimension of the other cleaning pad
elements
such that the extra width of the attachment layer can engage attachment
structures 33
located on a mop head 24 as shown in Figure 8A.
Removable Pre-Moistened CleaningWipe
Removable pre-moistened cleaning wipes can be used in combination with
handles described hereinbefore to form a cleaning implement. Such a cleaning
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-134-
implement can be used for light duty cleaning of hard surfaces and can be used
in the
cleaning methods, preferably in the two-step cleaning methods, described
hereinafter.
VI. Other Aspects and Specific Embodiments
While particular embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated
and/or described, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art that various
changes and
modifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the
invention, and it is intended to cover in the appended claims all such
modifications
that are within the scope of the invention.
VII. Methods of Use and Methods of Cleanin~
A. Wall Cleaning Process
In the context of a wall cleaner, the compositions can be distributed using a
spray device combined with a buffing implement, or dosed more conveniently
using a
roller, such as manual or powered paint rollers. When using rollers, it is
important to
remove soil from the roller. This can be achieved by either washing the device
with
water when it becomes very soiled, or using a wringer to scrape the soil from
the
roller. The wringing device can be used separately or housed together with the
roller.
Hand implements for wall cleaning can also be used.
Optionally, the implement is attached to a handle for harder to reach areas,
coverage and ease of use. For increased convenience, the compositions can be
delivered in the form of a pre-moistened wipe. The pre-moistened wipe can
provides
cleaning liquid and scrubbing surface all in one execution.
It is especially important to control dosing and coverage where the surface is
susceptible to damage. For best results, i.e., soil removal with minimal or no
surface
damage, dosing should be preferably from about 1 milliliter to about 20
milliliters per
square meter, more preferably from about 2 milliliters to about 10 milliliters
per
square meter. For best results, the product is applied at the above-
recommended
doses, covering surfaces to be treated completely, and allowed to air-dry.
Instructions
for use include pictures and/or words detailing preferred application pattern
and
dosing. The compositions of this invention are mild and minimize harm to most
painted- surfaces. Preferably solvent use is limited or not present for this
application.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-135-
Preferred compositions for wall cleaning include the preferred C8_16
alkylpolyglycoside either with or without hydrophilic polymers. The
compositions are
ideally suited for light duty jobs, i.e., general maintenance of painted and/
or wall-
papered surfaces, because of product mildness and generally low levels of
actives.
Additional benefits for painted walls, provided by the hydrophilic polymer,
include
shine, luster restoration, and soil prevention.
B. Counter and/or Cabinet Cleaning Process
In the context of a counter and cabinet cleaner, the compositions can be
distributed using a spray device combined with a buffing implement, or dosed
more
conveniently using a hand-implement or an implement attached to a handle for
harder
to reach areas, coverage, and ease of use. Optionally, for increased
convenience, the
compositions can be delivered in the form of a pre-moistened wipe. The pre-
moistened wipe provides liquid and scrubbing all in one execution. The wipe
can also
incorporate soft and abrasive materials as needed for spot cleaning. For best
results,
i.e., soil removal with delivery of high gloss and no streaks to treated areas
such that
no rinsing is required, dosing should be preferably from about 5 milliliter to
about 30
milliliters per square meter, more preferably from about 10 milliliters to
about 20
milliliters per square meter. The compositions of this invention are mild and
minimize harm to most painted surfaces and woods or worn Formica . Preferred
compositions for wall cleaning include the preferred C8_16 alkylpolyglycoside
either
with or without hydrophilic polymers. The compositions are ideally suited for
light
duty jobs, i.e., daily or weekly maintenance, because of product mildness and
generally low levels of actives. Importantly, residual levels of the
hydrophilic
polymers provide shine and soil prevention. Solvents, particularly volatile
solvents,
are preferably incorporated in these compositions, as they can provide
additional
cleaning, if needed, without streaking in a no-rinse application. The
compositions
also deliver next-time easier cleaning advantages of grease, encrusted foods
and stains
via the residual polymer left on surface. Additionally, the compositions can
be used
with articles to improve cleaning, such as abrasive pads, heat and steam. For
counters, antimicrobial benefits are particularly desirable. It is found that
compositions comprising can enhance the bacteriocidal benefits of disinfectant
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-136-
compositions delivered via cleaning substrates. Moreover, frequent of the
product in
a maintenance fashion will provide bacteria prevention benefits.
C. Floor Cleaning Process
In the context of a floor surfaces cleaner, the compositions can be
distributed
using a sponge, string or strip mop. By floor cleaners, we mean compositions
intended to clean and preserve common flooring inside or outside of the home
or
office. Floors that can be cleaned with compositions of the present invention
include
living room, dining room, kitchen, bathroom, cellar, attic, patio etc. These
floors can
consist of ceramic, porcelain, marble, Formica , no-wax vinyl, linoleum, wood,
quarry tile, brick or cement, and the like.
In the context of conventional, i.e., sponge, string and strip implements
preferably equipped with mop heads and handles, the compositions can be ready
to
use, i.e., used as is, or diluted in a bucket or other suitable receptacle at
dilution
factors specified in the instructions. For best results, thorough sweeping
and/or
vacuuming is recommended before wet mopping. It is recommended that the lowest
soiled floors be cleaned first, with progression toward more heavily surfaces.
This
maximizes the mileage of the solution and limits room to room contamination.
The
implement head is duriked or immersed into the solution (either dilute or
ready to use)
and wrung out. The implement should not be completely dry nor should it be
dripping
wet prior to mopping.
A preferred mopping pattern with a sponge mop or floor cloth used with a
brush with a handle is performed in an up-and-down overlapping motion from
left to
right (or right to left) and then repeated using an up-and-down overlapping
pattern
from right to left (or left to right). The up-and-down motion preferentially
covers
about 0.5 meters to about I meter. The left to right distance preferentially
is about 1
to about 2 meters. After mopping this area, i.e., from about 0.5 square meters
to about
2 square meters, the sponge mop or floor cloth should be re-immersed in
solution and
wrung again. By following this procedure the volume of solution left on
solution left
on the floor is from about 20 milliliters to about 50 milliliters per square
meter,
preferably from about 30 milliliters to about 40 milliliters per square meter.
Using a string or strip mop(e.g., cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), cotton,
synthetic or blends, and mixtures thereof), a preferred mopping pattern
consists of an
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-137-
up-and-down overlapping motion from left to right (or right to left) which is
then
repeated using a side to side overlapping motion from right to left (or left
to right).
The up-and-down motion preferentially covers about 0.5 meters to about 1
meter. The
side-to-side pattern right to left (or left to right) is preferably covers
from about 0.5
meters to about 1 meter. The mopping pattern preferably outlines a square
shape, i.e.,
from about 0.5 square meters to about 1 square meter. After mopping this area,
the
strip or string mop should be re-immersed in solution and wrung again. By
following
this procedure the volume of solution left on solution left on the floor is
from about 20
milliliters to about 50 milliliters per square meter, preferably from about 30
milliliters
to about 40 milliliters per square meter.
Optionally, to better control consistency of results using conventional mops,
the composition (either diluted or ready to use) is stored in one receptacle,
and the
mop-rinsing water is stored in another receptacle. This dual-receptacle
approach can
consist of two separate units or can be combined as one. Examples of this mode
of
use include squirt bottles, trigger sprays, mechanical sprays, garden misters,
and
electrical or battery-operated dosing devices. The advantages of this mode of
use
include always providing fresh solution to the floor, and keeping soiled water
(from
the cleaning of the floors) from re-contaminating the floor. Additionally,
this
approach effectively controls micro-organisms through less re-inoculation,
thereby
providing a more germ-free end result. This mode of use is also advantageous
for
spot cleaning, i.e., tough-to-clean areas can be pre-treated with product
before the
mopping begins; this mode of use also allows flexibility with respect to
dosage
control in that more solution can be administered to dirty areas, and less to
cleaner
areas, thereby improving value.
Optionally, to achieve more consistent and higher quality results, the
composition can be applied directly to the floor as a ready to use solution in
either
liquid or spray form. Examples of this mode of use include squirt bottles,
trigger
sprays, mechanical sprays, garden misters, and electrical or battery-operated
dosing
devices. Advantages of this mode of use include always providing fresh
solution to
the floor, and better mop maintenance, particularly if the mop is not re-
exposed to
dirty solution (i.e., the mop can be preserved longer by wringing out old
solution and
only applying fresh solution to the floor.). Additionally, this approach more
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 138 -
effectively removes microorganisms from the cleaning mechanism, thereby
providing
a more germ-free end result (i.e., less re-inoculation of the microorganisms).
This
mode of use is also advantageous for spot cleaning, i.e., tough-to-clean areas
can be
pre-treated with product before the mopping begins; this mode of use also
allows
flexibility with respect to dosage control in that more solution can be
administered to
dirty areas, and less to cleaner areas, thereby improving value.
Optionally, the fresh solution dispensing approach can be delivered using a
motorized system. An example of a motorized system for floor cleaning is the
Dirt
Devil Wet Vac. Preferably, the motorized system would comprise a chamber
containing fresh solution and a second chamber to suck up and hold the dirty
solution
removed from the floor. The motorized unit also preferably comprises squeegee
and/or scrubbing devices. The scrubbing device can be made of cotton,
cellulose
sponge etc. The dispensing unit can consist of a simple unit containing a
lever (which
can be calibrated for one or more dosing levels) to meter liquid onto the
floor.
Thorough sweeping and/or vacuuming is recommended prior to using the motorized
cleaning system. A preferred wiping pattern consists of an up-and-down
overlapping
motion from left to right (or right to left) and then repeated using an up-and-
down
overlapping pattern from right to left (or left to right). The up-and-down
motion
preferentially covers about 0.5 meters to about 1 meter. The left to right
distance
preferentially is about 1 to about 2 meters. After mopping this area, i.e.,
from about
0.5 square meters to about 2 square meters, the motorized cleaning unit is
engaged,
solution is squeezed into a puddle in a raking motion, and then sucked up into
the
dirty solution containment chamber using vacuum.
D. General Purpose and Floor Cleaning Using Pre-Moistened Cleanin~
Wipe
Optionally, for increased floor cleaning convenience, the compositions can be
delivered in the form of a pre-moistened wipe as described hereinbefore,
preferably
attached to a mop head and/or handle. The pre-moistened wipe can provide
liquid and
scrubbing all in one execution. Mopping pattern with a pre-moistened mop used
with
a handle is preferably performed in an up-and-down overlapping motion from
left to
right (or right to left) and then repeated using an up-and-down overlapping
pattern
from left to right (or right to left). The up-and-down motion preferentially
covers
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-139-
about 0.5 meters to about 1 meter. The left to right distance preferentially
is about 1
to about 2 meters. This mopping pattern is then repeated until the wipe is
either
substantially exhausted or dried out. Pre-moistened wipes can be advantageous
particularly for cleaning small areas, such as encountered in typical
bathrooms. They
are also readily available and versatile in that they can be used to clean
surfaces other
than floors, such as counter tops, walls etc., without having to use a variety
of other
liquids and/or implements. This approach also effectively removes and controls
microorganisms by minimizing implement inoculation, which is often seen with
conventional re-usable systems such as sponge, string and strip mops. Lack of
implement inoculation leads to a cleaner and more germ-free end result.
E. Floor Cleaning Using, a Disposable Cleaning Pad
Optionally, and most preferably, convenience and performance can be
maximized by using a system composed of a disposable cleaning pad as described
hereinbefore and a mode for applying fresh solution onto the floor. The pad
can be
composed of a laminate of non-wovens, cellulose and super-absorbent polymer.
This
cleaning pad is attached to a handle comprising a support head as described
hereinbefore. In such a system, solution application can be achieved via a
separate
squirt bottle or spray trigger system, or can be directly attached or built-in
to the
device (i.e., on the mop head or the handle). The delivery mechanism can be
actuated
by the operator, or can be battery-induced or electrical.
This system provides multiple benefits versus conventional cleaning modes. It
reduces time to clean the floor, because the pad sucks up dirty solution. It
eliminates
the need to carry heavy, messy buckets. Due to the absorbent pad which absorbs
and
locks away dirty solution, a single pad can clean large surface areas.
Additionally, since a fresh pad is used every time, germs and dirt are
trapped,
removed and thrown away, promoting better hygiene and malodor control.
Conventional mops, which are re-usable, can harbor dirt and germs, which can
be
spread throughout the household and create persistent bad odors in the mop and
in the
home. Through operator-controlled dosing and more efficient removal of dirty
solution from the floor, better end result is also achieved.
Additionally, because the cleaning process involves use of low levels of
solution in contact with the floor for much shorter periods of time relative
to
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-140-
conventional cleaning systems, (less solution is applied on the floor and the
super-
absorbent polymer absorbs most of it such that volume left behind with the
disposable
pad and mop is only from about 1 to about 5 milliliters of solution per square
meter),
the system provides improved surface safety on delicate surfaces. This is
particularly
important for the cleaning of wood, which tends to expand and then contract
when
excess treated with excess water.
Finally, this system is well suited for pre-treating tough soil spots prior to
full
floor cleaning because of the controlled dosing of solution. Unlike
conventional
mops, this system is more effective and more convenient for removal of spills.
For
example, conventional mops actually wet the floor in attempting to control
spills,
while absorbent paper towels or cloths require the user to bend down to
achieve spill
removal. Finally, the implement plus pad can be designed to allow easy access
to
tough to clean and hard to reach areas, e.g., under appliances, tables,
counters, and the
like. The use of super-absorbent polymer allows a reduction in volume of the
pad,
i.e., the pad is thin though highly absorbent due to the super-absorbent
structure being
able to absorb 100 times its weight; this is achievable with conventional
mops, which
require greater bulk for absorption purposes (cellulose or a synthetic
structures absorb
only up to about from 5 to about 10 times their weight).
For best results using the disposable pad and implement cleaning system, first
thoroughly sweep and/or vacuum before wet mopping. Prior to application of the
solution to the areas to be cleaned, preferably apply from about 10 to about
20
milliliters in small area (e.g., about one-half a square meter) and wipe pad
across area
back and forth several times until solution is almost completely absorbed.
This is
important in that it primes the pad, allowing it to function most effectively.
In an
application where the dosing mechanism is separate from the implement (i.e., a
detached dosing system), a priming set can optionally be to spray solution
directly
onto the pad, with even coverage using from about 10 to about 20 milliliters.
Apply
solution at rate of from about 5 to about 40 milliliters, more preferably from
about 10
to about 30 milliliters per square meter, spreading the liquid out as much as
possible
over the area section to be cleaned. This is followed by wiping using the
disposable
pad.
_.... ...._. .. I .
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 141 -
A preferred wiping pattern consists of an up-and-down overlapping motion
starting in the bottom left hand (or right hand) side of the section to be
cleaned, and
progressing the wiping pattern across the floor continuing to use up-and-down
wiping
motions. Wiping is then continued beginning at the top right (or left) side of
the
section to be cleaned and reversing the direction of the wipe pattern using a
side-to-
side motion. Another preferred wipe pattern consists of an up-and-down wiping
motion, followed by an up-and-down wiping motion in the reverse direction.
These
thorough preferred wiping patterns allow the pad to loosen and absorb more
solution,
dirt and germs, and provide a better end result in doing so by minimizing
residue left
behind. Another benefit of the above wiping patterns is minimization of
streaks as a
result of improved spreading of solution and the elimination of streak lines
from the
edges of the pad.
The pads are versatile in that they can be used for multiple cleanings and
multiple surfaces. Each pad is designed to clean one average size floor (i.e.,
from
about 10 to about 20 square meters) with an average soil load. Pads can need
to be
changed sooner if floors are larger than average, or especially dirty. To
determine if
the pad needs changing, look at the back of the pad and ascertain if the back
absorbent
layer is saturated with liquid and/or dirt.
The use of the compositions herein, where no rinsing is desirable, as opposed
to the types of compositions sold heretofore for treating non-bathtub/shower
area
surfaces including floor surfaces, walls and counter tops, provides improved
performance.
F. Two-Step Floor Cleaninp, Process
The present invention further encompasses a method of cleaning hard surfaces,
especially floors such as vinyl, linoleum, wood, and laminates, that generally
includes
a dry mopping step followed by a wet mopping step. It has been found that
performing
a dry mopping step before performing a wet mopping step, especially using the
preferred implements herein, results in a much more visually acceptable
surface in
terms of filming and/or streaking and much better soil removal which results
in a
cleaner surface. The present method of cleaning a hard surface can comprise:
(a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and
a removable, dry, cleaning substrate, preferably a nonwoven
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-142-
hydroentangled cleaning sheet as described herein before, to remove dust
and fine particulate matter from the surface;
(b) contacting the surface with a hard surface cleaning composition,
preferably
a hard surface cleaning composition as described herein, to wet the
surface;
(c) contacting the wet surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle
and a removable cleaning pad, preferably a cleaning pad as described
herein, to substantially remove the hard surface cleaning composition from
the surface; and
(d) allowing the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate
rinse
solution.
The present invention further relates to a method of cleaning hard surfaces,
especially floors such as vinyl, linoleum, wood, and laminates, comprising:
(a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and
a removable, dry, cleaning substrate, preferably a nonwoven
hydroentangled cleaning sheet as described herein, to remove dust and fine
particulate matter from the surface;
(b) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and
a removable, pre-moistened cleaning wipe, preferably a pre-moistened
cleaning wipe as described herein, to remove additional soil from the
surface; and
(c) allowing the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate
rinse
solution.
The utilization of a two-step floor cleaning method comprising a dry mopping
step followed by a wet mopping step helps to improve the overall end result
performance of a wet mopping system such as the cleaning implement described
hereinbefore comprising a disposable cleaning pad. In addition to providing
better
overall end result, especially in regard to the filming and/or streaking and
soil removal
of the hard surface being cleaned, this method provides the potential to
increase the
area that could be cleaned with a single cleaning pad of the present invention
and
therefore increases the cleaning pad mileage. Increased cleaning pad mileage
also
leads to better consumer value.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-143-
The present two-step floor cleaning method can be executed in the context of a
two-implement system - i.e. one cleaning implement for dry mopping/dusting and
one
cleaning implement for wet mopping - or the present method can be executed as
an
all-in-one mopping system - i.e. using the same cleaning implement for both
steps. If
the present method is executed using an all-in-one mopping system, additional
benefits include greater convenience due to easier storage and potentially
lower cost.
In addition, the present two-step floor cleaning method can optionally
comprise an additional step, wherein the third step comprises polishing and/or
buffing
the surface to improve shine, and/or add a protective coating and/or soil
repellence
coating.
The improvement in end result is typically due to the ability to remove more
particulate soil (especially fine particulate) prior to wet mopping. In the
context of
wet mopping with a disposable cleaning pad, particulate load and cleaning pad
saturation are important factors in overall performance because there is no
pad-rinsing
and/or surface-rinsing step. Specifically, while a disposable cleaning pad is
typically
very effective at picking up soils, including particulate soils, eventually it
reaches a
saturation point where soil can be re-deposited onto the surface being
cleaned. Even
though the amount of soil re-deposited is typically very low, it is normally
spread out
evenly over a much larger area than from where it was picked up originally.
Additionally, this fine particulate can combine with solution residue to
create an end
result which looks hazy (low shine) due to filming and/or streaking of the
surface.
While conventional dry mopping systems, such as vacuuming or using a
broom, can be used in the present method, such dry mopping systems are not as
effective at picking up finer particulate due to several reasons including the
following:
(1) with conventional systems consumers sweep or vacuum soils which are
visible
(usually larger soils) and miss soils that are less visible (fine
particulate); (2) brooms
typically are made with large bristles where finer particulate can pass
through and be
missed; (3) many vacuum cleaners are effective at picking up larger
particulate but
can stir up and blow around finer particulate. Indeed, standard vacuums have
to allow
enough air flow through the vacuum cleaner bags for proper function. This air
flow
contains fine particulate. This is supported in the literature including Lioy,
Wainman,
Zhang and Goldsmith, "Typical household vacuum cleaners: the collection
efficiency
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-144-
and emission characteristics of fine particles" (1999) J. Air Waste Management
Association, 49:200-206.
By creating a method of cleaning a hard surface where consumers can do a
thorough and effective dry mopping step prior to wet mopping, the end result
of such
a cleaning method can be improved dramatically particularly in the context of
using a
disposable cleaning pad, such as those described herein, for wet mopping.
Using
cleaning sheets composed of hydro-entangled polyester fibers can achieve
outstanding
particulate pick-up. Such nonwoven hydroentangled cleaning sheets are
described in
U.S. Patent No. 6,645,604 issued November 11, 2003 (Fereshtehkhou et al.);
U.S.
Patent No. 6,561,354 issued May 13, 2003 (Fereshtehkhou et al.); and U.S.
Patent No.
5,525,397, issued June 11, 1996 (Shizuno et al.).
To maximize the synergy between dry dusting and wet mopping, the present
methods can be carried out using several varying executions and instructions
for use.
In one embodiment, a "kit" can be provided that has two implements and two
substrate types. One implement would be used with dry mopping sheets the other
implement would be used with wet mopping pads. Such a kit preferably provides
the
consumer a set of instructions to always dry mop before wet mopping for best
results.
The kit can also be sold separately with advertising and instructions in each
kit being
used to explain the benefits of using the two systems together. Optionally,
the
advertising could include a coupon or mail-in rebate in each of the separate
kits that
will encourage purchase and usage of both to get the synergistic benefits. In
another
embodiment, the present methods can be carried out using an "all-in-one" mop,
that
includes dry cleaning sheets that can be attached and cleaning pads and/or
wipes for
wet mopping that can be attached to same mop to be used for both tasks. Again,
the
kit can provide consumers instructions to always dry mop before wet mopping
for best
results.
While the benefits can be seen on any floor, floors with more texture, pores
and cavities, like vinyl and ceramic, especially benefit when doing an
efficient dry
mopping step prior to wet mopping. The benefit seen is significant
improvements in
end result appearance, especially in terms of filming and/or streaking and
soil left
behind. This improvement can be seen when cleaning areas with either loose
fine
particulate or areas with tacked-down particulate mixed with grease. The
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-145-
improvement in performance is apparent when doing a dry mopping step with
separate
implement or using the same implement as used in the wet mopping step. Without
an
efficient dry mopping step first, a wet mopping cleaning method is preferably
carried
out using a cleaning pad comprising functional cuffs as described
hereinbefore,
because the functional cuffs aid in scrubbing and particulate pick-up.
However, if a
hard surface cleaning method includes an efficient dry mopping step, then
acceptable
end result performance, especially in terms of filming and/or streaking, can
be
achieved with a wet mopping step using a cleaning pad as described herein,
without
the optional functional cuffs. This is due to the fact that an efficient dry
mopping step
effectively removes a significant amount of particulate from the surface,
particularly
larger particulate which is typically soil trapped in functional cuffs of the
present
cleaning pads.
In one embodiment, a dry mopping system comprises a cleaning implement
that is light-weight (about 200-400 g) with multi-position universal joint and
would be
designed with mechanism to attach dry dusting sheets (for example, attachment
structures located on a mop head as described hereinbefore, or mechanical
clips). The
light weight and flexibility is important to allow frequent use to keep
particulate soil
and dust, lint and hair under control. The dry mopping system further
comprises dry,
cleaning sheets that are preferably made of hydroentangled polyester with
patterning
and additives as described in U.S. Patent No. 6,561,354 issued May 13, 2003
(Fereshtehkhou et al.); U.S. Patent No. 6,645,604 issued November 11, 2003
(Fereshtehkhou et al.); and U.S. Patent No. 5,525,397, issued June 11, 1996
(Shizuno
et al.).
In this embodiment, a wet mopping system comprises a cleaning implement
having a more solid, durable structure (weight about 1100-1300g) that is
primarily
designed for wet mopping. The wet mopping system preferably has a reservoir
for
attaching a bottle with a hard surface cleaning composition and have a
spraying
mechanism built-in.. Such a cleaning implement has been described hereinbefore
and
is shown in Figures 5 and 8. The mop head of such a cleaning implement
preferably
has velcro hooks on under side for attaching a cleaning pad having an
attachment
layer comprising loop material. The wet mopping system further comprises a
cleaning
pad as described hereinbefore.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-146-
In another embodiment, an "all-in-one" cleaning implement is provided that is
compatible with both dry, cleaning sheets for dry mopping and absorbent
cleaning
pads for wet mopping. Such a cleaning implement preferably is light-weight,
yet
reasonably durable (about 600 - 900 g). It preferably has a universal joint
that is a
multi-position joint to allow for easy dry and wet mopping, but also allows
for a
sweeping motion. A handle of such a cleaning implement preferably has a
reservoir
for attaching a bottle with hard surface cleaning solution and have a spraying
mechanism built-in. The handle of the cleaning implement can alternatively be
devoid
of a liquid delivery system. With such a cleaning implement, a hard surface
cleaning
solution can be dispensed with a bottle that is separate from the cleaning
implement
with either a trigger sprayer or simple dosing cap (similar to water bottle).
This
implement can optionally have feature for attaching bottle to mop to allow two
hands
to be used during mopping, such as a cage structure for holding the bottle as
described
hereinbefore and as shown in Figure 7. The mop head of the handle of the
cleaning
implement preferably has velcro hooks on the bottom surface to attach a
cleaning pad
and having attachment structures or mechanical clips on top of the mop head
for
attaching a dry, cleaning sheet. Such an "all-in-one" cleaning implement
handle is
shown in Figure 8A and described hereinbefore. The "all-in-one" cleaning
implement
further comprises a dry, cleaning sheet preferably made of a hydroentangled
polyester
material with patterning and additives as described in U.S. Patent No.
6,561,354
issued May 13, 2003 (Fereshtehkhou et al.); U.S. Patent No. 6,645,604 issued
November 11, 2003 (Fereshtehkhou et al.); and U.S. Patent No. 5,525,397,
issued
June 11, 1996 (Shizuno et al.). The dry, cleaning sheets are prefearbly made
large
enough to attach over a wet pad and be inserted into attachment structures on
the mop
head or be clipped onto mechanical attachments. This provides an additional
benefit
of the dry, cleaning sheet conforming to a pyramid shape of a cleaning pad
having
multiple planar surfaces. In an alternative embodiment of the dry, cleaning
sheet, the
dry, cleaning sheet has a notch cut out at both ends of the dry, cleaning
sheet. These
notches can get pushed into the mechanical clips or attachment structures on
top of the
mop head. These notches allow for this sheet to be used with a cleaning pad,
in either
a dry or wet environment. In a wet environment, the notch 126 (shown in Fig.
8B)
allows for solution to be dispensed from a spray nozzle without blocking
solution.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-147-
Also the notch provides freedom for a universal joint to be moved around. The
"all-in-
one" cleaning implement further comprises a cleaning pad of the present
invention.
In an alternative embodiment of an "all-in-one" cleaning implement, the
cleaning implement comprises a dry, cleaning sheet in combination with an
absorbent
cleaning pad to form a single dry/wet cleaning substrate. The dry/wet cleaning
substrate can comprise a storage layer having a high absorptive capacity
(e.g., 100-
1000 grams), an attachment layer, and a liquid pervious scrubbing layer. This
storage
layer preferably attaches directly to velcro hooks located on a mop head of
the "all-in-
one" cleaning implement. The other part of the pad preferably lays directly
over the
storage layer and is preferably in direct contact with floor (this defined as
a primary
floor pad). The primary floor pad can be used for dry mopping and/or wet
mopping.
This primary pad floor pad can be a composite having an outer layer of
materials
effective at picking up particulate soils (i.e. hydroentangled polyester), an
absorbent
layer for absorbing some liquid (20-100 g capacity), and an outer layer that
would
allow solution and dirt to pass through into the lower higher absorbing
storage pad
and could be used for attaching primary pad to mop head by attaching on top of
mop
head containing attachment structures or mechanical clips.
A set of instructions for use can be provided comprising an instruction to
place
a primary pad over a storage pad and perform a dry mopping step first. The set
of
instuctions can further comprise an instruction to then remove the dirty
primary floor
pad and replace with a clean primary floor pad. Then wet mop a small area (10
sqm)
with this primary pad over storage pad. Remove this dirty primary pad and
place a
new clean primary pad put over same storage pad to clean another 10 sqm area.
The
idea here is to improve performance by having a detachable mini pad in order
to have
fresh layer contacting floor to minimize soil re-deposition. At the same time
by
having a lower storage pad with high absorptive capacity cost is reduced. In
otherwords a consumer could use up to anywhere from 2 to 10 primary pads for
every
storage pad.
The storage pad can attach to the mop via a loop (on a pad) to hook design (on
a mop). On the other hand the primary pad could attach through several
mechanisms:
(1) have "wings" that can attach to mechanical clips or attachment structures
on top of
mop head; (2) have "wings" with an adhesive, such as described hereinbefore,
that can
I I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-148-
attach to primary pad; or (3) have loop material on a primary pad that can
attach to
hook material on storage pad.
In another alternative embodiment of an "all-in-one" cleaning implement, the
dry/wet cleaning can be achieved in a single pad that has two distinct sides.
In such a
pad, one side is comprised of a substrate design that is effective for dry
mopping. The
opposite side (by opposite it is meant flipping the pad 180 degrees) is
comprised of a
substrate that is designed for wet mopping. The benefits of such a design is
that the
consumer can easily alternate between dry and wet mopping which can be
advantageous when dry/wet cleaning is done on a room by room basis as opposed
to
dry mop entire house first then finish with wet mopping. To protect the dry
mopping
side of the pad from getting wet when doing wet mopping, the pad can
optionally
include a liquid impermeable layer comprising a material such as polyethelene.
The
dry mopping sheet can then be placed over this liquid impermeable layer.
Optionally,
the liquid impermeable layer can be made wider than the mop head such that it
could
be used as an attachment layer which is clipped or mechanically attached to
structures
on top of the mop head. To further protect the dry mopping substrate from
getting wet
during wet mopping, the dry mopping substrate would be made narrower than the
liquid impermeable barrier attachment layer. With this design the liquid
impermeable
attachment layer shields the dry mopping layer from liquid contact.
Instructions for
use can be provided on how to best use both sides effectively, including the
instruction to attach the mopping/cleaning pad to the mop head such that the
dry
mopping substrate contacts the surface to be cleaned, then wiping the surface
with the
mopping/cleaning pad, then removing the mopping/cleaning pad and reattaching
the
pad to the mop head such that the wet mopping substrate contacts the surface
to be
cleaned, then wiping the surface with the mopping/cleaning pad.
VIII. Test Methods
A. Performance Under Pressure
This test determines the gram/gram absorption of deionized water for a
cleaning pad that is laterally confined in a piston/cylinder assembly under an
initial
confining pressure of 0.09 psi (about 0.6 kPa). (Depending on the composition
of the
cleaning pad sample, the confining pressure can decrease slightly as the
sample
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 149 -
absorbs water and swells during the time of the test.) The objective of the
test is to
assess the ability of a cleaning pad to absorb fluid, over a practical period
of time,
when the pad is exposed to usage conditions (horizontal wicking and
pressures).
The test fluid for the PUP capacity test is deionized water. This fluid is
absorbed by the cleaning pad under demand absorption conditions at near-zero
hydrostatic pressure.
A suitable apparatus 510 for this test is shown in Figure 14. At one end of
this
apparatus is a fluid reservoir 512 (such as a petri dish) having a cover 514.
Reservoir
512 rests on an analytical balance indicated generally as 516. The other end
of
apparatus 510 is a fritted funnel indicated generally as 518, a
piston/cylinder assembly
indicated generally as 520 that fits inside funnel 518, and cylindrical
plastic fritted
funnel cover indicated generally as 522 that fits over funnel 518 and is open
at the
bottom and closed at the top, the top having a pinhole. Apparatus 510 has a
system
for conveying fluid in either direction that consists of sections glass
capillary tubing
indicated as 524 and 531a, flexible plastic tubing (e.g., 1/4 inch i.d. and
3/8 inch o.d.
Tygon tubing) indicated as 531b, stopcock assemblies 526 and 538 and Teflon
connectors 548, 550 and 552 to connect glass tubing 524 and 531a and stopcock
assemblies 526 and 538. Stopcock assembly 526 consists of a 3-way valve 528,
glass
capillary tubing 530 and 534 in the main fluid system, and a section of glass
capillary
tubing 532 for replenishing reservoir 512 and forward flushing the fritted
disc in
fritted funnel 518. Stopcock assembly 538 similarly consists of a 3-way valve
540,
glass capillary tubing 542 and 546 in the main fluid line, and a section of
glass
capillary tubing 544 that acts as a drain for the system.
Referring to Figure 15, assembly 520 consists of a cylinder 554, a cup-like
piston indicated by 556 and a weight 558 that fits inside piston 556. Attached
to
bottom end of cylinder 554 is a No. 400 mesh stainless steel cloth screen 559
that is
biaxially stretched to tautness prior to attachment. The cleaning pad sample
indicated
generally as 560 rests on screen 559 with the surface-contacting (or
scrubbing) layer in
contact with screen 559. The cleaning pad sample is a circular sample having a
diameter of 5.4 cm. While sample 560 is depicted as a single layer, the sample
will
actually consist of a circular sample having all layers contained by the pad
from which
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-150-
the sample is cut. Furthermore, it is understood that a pad from which a
circular
sample taken anywhere within the pad, having the absorbent capacity defined
herein,
is within the scope of the present invention. That is, where a cleaning pad
has regions
comprised of different materials through the thickness of the pad, samples
should be
taken from each of those regions and the absorbent capacity should be measured
for
each sample. If any of the samples has the absorbent capacity values described
above,
the pad is deemed to have this absorbent capacity and therefore is within the
scope of
the present invention.
Cylinder 554 is bored from a transparent LEXAN rod (or equivalent) and has
an inner diameter of 6.00 cm (area = 28.25 cm2), with a wall thickness of
approximately 5 mm and a height of approximately 5 cm. The piston 556 is in
the
form of a Teflon cup and is machined to fit into cylinder 554 within tight
tolerances.
Cylindrical stainless steel weight 558 is machined to fit snugly within piston
556 and
is fitted with a handle on the top (not shown) for ease in removing. The
combined
weight of piston 556 and weight 558 is 145.3 g, which corresponds to a
pressure of
0.09 psi for an area of 22.9 cm2.
The components of apparatus 510 are sized such that the flow rate of deionized
water therethrough, under a 10 cm hydrostatic head, is at least 0.01
g/cm2/sec, where
the flow rate is norrnalized by the area of fritted funnel 518. Factors
particularly
impactful on flow rate are the permeability of the fritted disc in fritted
funnel 518 and
the inner diameters of glass tubing 524, 530, 534, 542, 546 and 531a, and
stopcock
valves 528 and 540.
Reservoir 512 is positioned on an analytical balance 516 that is accurate to
at
least 0.01 g with a drift of less than 0.1 g/hr. The balance is preferably
interfaced to a
computer with software that can (i) monitor balance weight change at pre-set
time
intervals from the initiation of the PUP test and (ii) be set to auto initiate
on a weight
change of 0.01-0.05 g, depending on balance sensitivity. Capillary tubing 524
entering the reservoir 512 should not contact either the bottom thereof or
cover 514.
The volume of fluid (not shown) in reservoir 512 should be sufficient such
that air is
not drawn into capillary tubing 524 during the measurement. The fluid level in
reservoir 512, at the initiation of the measurement, should be approximately 2
mm
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-151 -
below the top surface of fritted disc in fritted funnel 518. This can be
confirmed by
placing a small drop of fluid on the fritted disc and gravimetrically
monitoring its slow
flow back into reservoir 512. This level should not change significantly when
piston/cylinder assembly 520 is positioned within funnel 518. The reservoir
should
have a sufficiently large diameter (e.g., -14 cm) so that withdrawal of -40 ml
portions
results in a change in the fluid height of less than 3 mm.
Prior to measurement, the assembly is filled with deionized water. The fritted
disc in fritted funnel 518 is forward flushed so that it is filled with fresh
deionized
water. To the extent possible, air bubbles are removed from the bottom surface
of the
fritted disc and the system that connects the funnel to the reservoir. The
following
procedures are carried out by sequential operation of the 3-way stopcocks:
1_ Excess fluid on the upper surface of the fritted disc is removed (e.g.
poured) from fritted funnel 518.
2. The solution height/weight of reservoir 512 is adjusted to the proper
level/value.
3. Fritted funnel 518 is positioned at the correct height relative to
reservoir 512.
4. Fritted funne1518 is then covered with fritted funnel cover 522.
5. The reservoir 512 and fritted funnel 518 are equilibrated with valves
528 and 540 of stopcock assemblies 526 and 538 in the open
connecting position.
6. Valves 528 and 540 are then closed.
7. Valve 540 is then turned so that the funnel is open to the drain tube
544.
8: The system is allowed to equilibrate in this position for 5 minutes.
9. Valve 540 is then returned to its closed position.
Steps Nos. 7-9 temporarily "dry" the surface of fritted funnel 518 by exposing
it to a small hydrostatic suction of -5 cm. This suction is applied if the
open end of
tube 544 extends -5 cm below the level of the fritted disc in fritted funnel
518 and is
filled with deionized water. Typically -0.04 g of fluid is drained from the
system
during this procedure. This procedure prevents premature absorption of
deionized
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-152-
water when piston/cylinder assembly 520 is positioned within fritted funnel
518. The
quantity of fluid that drains from the fritted funnel in this procedure
(referred to as the
fritted funnel correction weight, or "Wffc")) is measured by conducting the
PUP test
(see below) for a time period of 20 minutes without piston/cylinder assembly
520.
Essentially all of the fluid drained from the fritted funnel by this procedure
is very
quickly reabsorbed by the funnel when the test is initiated. Thus, it is
necessary to
subtract this correction weight from weights of fluid removed from the
reservoir
during the PUP test (see below).
A round die-cut sample 560 is placed in cylinder 554. The piston 556 is slid
into cylinder 554 and positioned on top of the cleaning pad sample 560. The
pistonJcylinder assembly 520 is placed on top of the frit portion of funnel
518, the
weight 558 is slipped into piston 556, and the top of funnel 518 is then
covered with
fritted funnel cover 522. After the balance reading is checked for stability,
the test is
initiated by opening valves 528 and 540 so as to connect funnel 518 and
reservoir 512.
With auto initiation, data collection commences immediately, as funnel 518
begins to
reabsorb fluid.
Data is recorded at intervals over a total time period of 1200 seconds (20
minutes). PUP absorbent capacity is determined as follows:
t1200 absorbent capacity (g/g) =[Wr(t=0) - Wr(t=1200) - Wffc]/Wds
where 4200 absorbent capacity is the g/g capacity of the pad after 1200
seconds,
Wr(t=0) is the weight in grams of reservoir 512 prior to initiation,
Wr(t=1200) is the
weight in grams of reservoir 512 at 1200 seconds after initiation, Wffc is the
fritted
funnel correction weight and Wds is the dry weight of the cleaning pad sample.
B. Saueeze-out
The ability of the cleaning pad to retain fluid when exposed to in-use
pressures, and therefor to avoid fluid "squeeze-out", is another important
parameter to
the present invention. "Squeeze-out" is measured on an entire cleaning pad by
determining the amount of fluid that can be blotted from the sample with
Whatman
filter paper under pressures of 0.25 psi (1.5 kPa). Squeeze-out is performed
on a
sample that has been saturated to capacity with deionized water via horizontal
wicking
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-153-
(specifically, via wicking from the surface of the pad consisting of the
scrubbing or
surface-contacting layer). (One means for obtaining a saturated sample is
described as
the Horizontal Gravimetric Wicking method of U.S. Patent No. 5849805 issued
December 15, 1998, (Dyer et al.)). The fluid-containing sample is placed
horizontally
in an apparatus capable of supplying the respective pressures, preferably by
using an
air-filled bag that will provide evenly distributed pressure across the
surface of the
sample. The squeeze-out value is reported as the weight of test fluid lost per
weight
of the wet sample.
Again, where a cleaning pad has regions comprised of different materials
through the thickness of the pad, samples should be taken from each of those
regions
and squeeze-out should be measured on all of the samples. If any of the
samples has a
squeeze-out value described above, the pad is deemed to have this squeeze-out
value.
C. Resiliency
"Resiliency" is the ability of a cleaning pad to "spring back" to its original
thickness (z-dimension) when dry after being subjected to saturation with
water and
compression due to a downward force is another important parameter to the
present
invention. Resiliency is measured according to the following method. A
cleaning pad
is saturated with an aqueous nonionic buffered solution. The original
thickness of the
cleaning pad (the z-dimension) is then measured. A downward pressure
(equivalent to
about .25 psi) is then exerted on the cleaning pad, parallel to its z-
dimension. The
pressure is released, and the thickness of the cleaning pad is measured after
a period of
seconds. The resiliency is calculated as a percentage, representing the ratio
of its
thickness after being compressed under pressure to its original thickness
before any
pressure is applied and pad has been saturated.
The following are non-limiting examples of the present invention.
IX. Examples
A. Perfume
The following are non-limiting examples of perfumes that are suitable for
incorporation in the present hard surface cleaning compositions.
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 154 -
Perfume A
Perfume Material Wt% Range
Phenyl Hexanol 0.1 - 1.0
Cis-3-Hexenyl Acetate 0.1 - 1.0
Phenyl Ethyl Alcohol 10.0 - 50.0
Benzyl Acetate 1.0 - 10.0
Benzyl Propionate 1.0 - 10.0
Dihydro Myrcenol 1.0 - 10.0
Hydroxycitronellal 1.0 - 10.0
Geraniol 1.0 - 10.0
Citronellol 1.0 - 10.0
Citronellal Nitrile 1.0 - 10.0
Linalool 1.0 - 10.0
Dipropylene Glycol 10.0 - 50.0
Perfume B
Perfume Material Wt% Range
Hexyl Acetate 1.0 - 10.0
Cis-3-Hexenyl Acetate 0.5 - 5.0
Beta Gamma Hexanol 0.5 - 5.0
Prenyl Acetate 0.5 - 5.0
Ligustral 0.5 - 5.0
Ethyl-2-Methyl Butyrate 0.01 - 1.0
Nerol 10.0 - 50.0
Citral 1.0 - 10.0
Citronellal Nitrile 0.5 - 5.0
Decyl Aldehyde 0.5 - 5.0
Octyl Aldehyde 0.5 - 5.0
Verdox 1.0 - 10.0
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
- 155 -
Methyl Dihydro Jasmonate 0.5 - 5.0
Limate 0.01 - 1.0
Dipropylene Gylcol 10.0 - 50.0
Perfume C
Perfume Material Wt% Ranne
Hydroxycitronellal 1.0 - 10.0
Helional 1.0 - 10.0
Dimethyl Benzyl Carbinol 0.5 - 5.0
Citral 1.0 - 10.0
Methyl Dihydro Jasmonate 0.5 - 5.0
Hexyl Cinnamic Aldehyde 0.5 - 5.0
Citronellal Nitrile 0.5 - 5.0
Dihydro Myrcenol 10.0 - 50.0
Orange Terpenes 10.0 - 50.0
Dipropylene Gylcol 10.0 - 50.0
These perfumes are non-limiting examples of perfume suitable for use in the
present
hard surface cleaning compositions to provide a positive scent signal, while
not
negatively impacting filming and/or streaking of the surface being cleaned.
B. Hard Surface Cleaning Compositions
The following are non-limiting examples of hard surface cleaning
compositions that are useful in the present invention, especially in
combination with
the present cleaning pads and/or cleaning implements. Ingredient amounts are
percentages by weight of the composition.
EXAMPLE
I I .I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-156-
Ingredient A B C D E
Neodol 1-5 0.03% --- 0.03% --- ---
Witconate NAS-8 0.01% 0.02% 0.01% --- ---
Planteran 2000 --- 0.05% --- 0.004% 0.004%
Ammonia Hydroxide --- --- --- 0.1% ---
Glacial Acetic Acid --- --- --- --- ---
DMAMP-80 4 0.01% 0.01% 0.06% --- 0.01%
Dowanol PnP 5 2.0% 2.0% 2.0% 4.0% 4.0%
Polyvinvylpyridine N- 0.015% 0.015% 0.015% 0.003% 0.003%
oxide
1-Methoxy-2-Butanol --- --- --- --- ---
Silicone suds suppressor 6 0.00125% 0.00125 0.00125% --- ---
%
Perfume 0.033% 0.06% 0.035% --- ---
Xylenolphthalein --- --- 0.001 % --- ---
Deionized water Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance
EXAMPLE
InEredient F G H I
Neodol 1-5 --- 0.03% 0.03% 0.03%
Witconate NAS-8 --- 0.01% 0.01% 0.01%
Planteran 2000 0.004% --- --- ---
Ammonia Hydroxide 0.01% --- --- ---
Glacial Acetic Acid --- 0.05% 0.05% ---
DMAMP-80 --- --- --- 0.01%
Dowanol PnP 5 4.0% --- 2.0% ---
Polyvinvylpyridine N- 0.003% 0.015% 0.015% 0.015%
oxide
1-Methoxy-2-Butanol --- --- --- 2.0%
Silicone suds suppressor --- 0.00125% 0.00125% 0.00125%
1 I
CA 02349726 2005-01-27
-157-
Perfume 0.015% 0.03% 0.03% 0.03%
Xylenolphthalein --- --- --- ---
Deionized water Balance Balance Balance Balance
' CI iE5 alcohol ethoxylate commercially available from Shell Chemical.
2 Linear Cg sulfonate commercially available from Witco Chemical.
3 C8-C16 alkyl polyglucoside commercially available from Henkel.
4 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol commercially available from Angus
Chemical.
5 Propylene glycol n-propyl ether commercially available from Dow Chemical.
6 Silicone suds suppressor commercially available from Dow Coming under the
trade
name Dow Coming AF Emulsion.
